JP2017196361A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a pinball game machine allowing a player to fully enjoy a performance produced when changing over shooting guide information.SOLUTION: When a game state is transferred from a first game state in which it is advantageous to a player to aim at a first flow-down passage, to a second game state in which it is advantageous to the player to aim at a second flow-down passage, a game machine displays second shooting guide information for aiming at the second flow-down passage, however, when the game state is transferred from the second game state to the first game state, displays first shooting guide information for aiming at the first flow-down passage. When the display is changed over from the second shooting guide information to the first shooting guide information (Figure 27 t6), or when the display is to be changed over (Figure 31 te), the game machine produces a performance (a treasure box performance) for diverting the player's attention from the changeover event from the second shooting guide information to the first shooting guide information, for a prescribed period (Figure 27 tb-tc and Figure 31 tx-ty) including at least a period when at least the first shooting guide information is displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 25

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine, there is a bullet ball gaming machine called a probable falling type. In this fall type gaming machine, when the big hit, the gaming state after the big hit ends shifts to a probable change state (high probability, with electric Chu support), and the big hit lottery and the fall lottery are performed during the probable change state, If the winning lottery is won first, the gaming state changes from the probabilistic state to the short time state (low probability, with electric support), or from the probabilistic state to the normal state (low probability, electric support is not provided) Migrate to

  Also, this type of ball game machine has a “right-handed” which is advantageous to the player under certain conditions regarding the launch direction of the game ball during the jackpot game and during the probability change state after the jackpot game. After that, when the probability change state ends, the guidance information display of “left-handed” which is advantageous to the player is performed. (See Patent Document 1). This guidance information display control in the launch direction should be switched at the same time when the launch direction advantageous to the player is switched.

  Therefore, in a probability falling type gaming machine, when controlling the display of guidance information in the launch direction from “right-handed” to “left-handed”, a “left-handed guidance notification image” is displayed on the screen of the image display means. The timing should be performed simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display operation won in the falling lottery, that is, simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation display operation that has fallen from the probability variation state to the normal state, and the actual machine observes this. Therefore, when the guidance notification image on the screen switches from “right-handed” guidance information display to “left-handed” guidance information display, the player visually recognizes the switching event of the guidance notification image from the moment of the switching. Ready to go. If a player recognizes a switching event from a “right-handed” guidance information display to a “left-handed” guidance information display, he / she must stop launching so that he / she does not play a game or generate useless balls. Presumed to be.

JP 2012-196349 A

  However, in the fall type gaming machine, in the symbol variation display operation that has fallen from the probability variation state or the short time state to the low probability state, as the effect of the symbol variation display operation at the start of the symbol variation display operation, for example, the probability variation state or An effect (hereinafter referred to as “skeptical effect”) that suggests or suspiciously falls from the short-time state to the normal state appears. Assuming that the battle effect appears as this skeptical effect, and it is informed whether or not it has fallen to the normal state based on the result of the battle, at the same time the symbol variation display operation starts, on the other hand, the driving direction guidance Notification (notification of firing guidance information) is switched from right-handed to left-handed, and on the other hand, a situation appears where a battle effect appears as a skeptical effect. That is, although the battle effect has just started, the driving direction guidance notification has already been switched from right-handed to left-handed.

  Here, if the player recognizes the switching event of the firing guidance information from the right strike to the left strike by visual observation, it is estimated that the launch is stopped. However, there is a problem that if the time point for recognizing the switching event of the firing guidance information, that is, the operation time point for stopping the launching is too early, it is not meaningful to continue the skeptical effect as the effect in the symbol variation display operation. .

  For example, when launching is stopped simultaneously with the occurrence of the switching event of the firing guidance information, the battle effect, which is the effect of the symbol variation display operation, has just started. So, if the player stops launching from the moment this battle production has just started, from the viewpoint of game play, the battle production has been revealed as a production corresponding to the symbol variation display operation. Despite the fact that the battle effect continues for a long time, the player stops the game, and the player can fully enjoy the battle effect that is the effect of the symbol variation display operation. It will not be.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a bullet ball game machine that can solve the above-described problems and allow a player to fully enjoy the effects that occur when the firing guidance information is switched.

  The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) It is configured to be able to generate multiple types of gaming states,
The game area (3) is configured to be divided into a first flow path (3b) and a second flow path (3c) according to the strength of the game ball launched by the launching means, and according to the gaming state, In a ball game machine configured such that a game progress acts on a player in an advantageous or disadvantageous manner depending on whether the game ball is caused to flow down to any one of the first flow path and the second flow path,
Notice effect control means (S743 to S750) for causing the notice display effect to appear on the image display means (liquid crystal display device 36) by the notice lottery;
The image display means provides notification of firing guidance information (right arrow image 374a, left arrow image 374b) regarding which one of the first flow path and the second flow path is advantageous for the player according to the gaming state. Firing guidance information control means (S742) for performing,
The firing guidance information control means has a second gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous for the player from the first gaming state in which it is advantageous for the player to aim at the first downstream route. When the transition is made, the second firing guidance information for guiding the second downstream route as the firing guidance information is displayed (S771, S772, S775), and the gaming state is changed from the second gaming state to the above-mentioned gaming state. When transitioning to the first gaming state, it has firing guidance information display control means (S762) for displaying first firing guidance information for guiding to aim at the first downstream route as the firing guidance information (S773, S779). ,
The notice effect control means is when the firing guidance information display control means switches from the display of the second firing guidance information to the display of the first firing guidance information (t6 in FIG. 27) or when it switches (FIG. 31). Te), at least in a predetermined period (tb to tc in FIG. 27, tx to ty in FIG. 31) including the period in which the first firing guidance information is displayed, the firing guidance information is the second firing guidance information. An effect for diverting the player's attention from the event of switching from the display to the display of the first firing guidance information (the treasure chest effect of FIG. 27, the treasure chest effect of FIG. 31) appears.
A ball game machine characterized by that.

(2) The second emission guide for guiding the first emission guidance information (left arrow image 374b) for guiding the first downflow path to aim at the second downflow path, the discharge guidance information display control means. Display in a display mode (left arrow right move) similar to the guidance information (right arrow image 374a right arrow right move),
The bullet ball game machine according to (1) above, wherein

(3) An effect for diverting the player's attention from an event in which the firing guide information is switched from the display of the second launch guide information to the display of the first launch guide information is Directing)
The bullet ball game machine according to (1) or (2) above, wherein

  According to the present invention, it is possible to allow the player to fully enjoy the effects that occur when the firing guidance information is switched.

It is a perspective view of the front side which shows the external appearance of the bullet ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the front side of the game board of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control apparatus of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure where it uses for description of the hit classification of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure where it uses for description of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the prefetch notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a start opening check process used in the special figure 1 start opening check process and the special figure 2 start opening check process in FIG. 9; It is a flowchart which shows the ground state setting process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fall determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electrically-powered article management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception process at the time of winning in the received command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern designation | designated command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the decoration symbol designation | designated command reception process in the command analysis process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge guidance information control process in FIG. It is a figure which shows the discharge guidance information output start process in FIG. It is a figure which shows the discharge guidance information output completion | finish process in FIG. It is the figure which showed the list of Embodiment 1-6 by which the left-handed guidance alert | report of this invention is made. It is the figure which showed the relationship between the firing guidance information alerting | reporting and treasure chest effect in Embodiment 1 of this invention by the time of right-handed alerting | reporting, and the time of left-handed alerting | reporting. It is the time chart which showed the specific example 1 in Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is the time chart which showed the relationship of the period length of the discharge | release guidance information alert | report of the specific example 1 in Embodiment 1 of this invention, and a treasure chest effect. It is the figure which showed the relationship between the discharge guidance information alerting | reporting and treasure chest effect in Embodiment 2 of this invention by the time of right-handed alerting | reporting, and the time of left-handed alerting | reporting. It is the time chart which showed the specific example 2A in Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is the time chart which showed the specific example 2B in Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is the time chart which showed the relationship of the period length of the discharge guidance information alerting | reporting and treasure chest effect in Embodiment 2 of this invention. It is the figure which showed the relationship between the treasure chest effect and the reservation memory in Embodiment 2 of this invention. In Embodiment 2 of this invention, it is the figure which showed the state division correlation table which comprises a part of transfer destination mode distribution table. In Embodiment 2 of this invention, it is the figure which showed the production mode transfer lottery table which comprises a part of transfer destination mode distribution table. In Embodiment 2 of this invention, it is the figure which showed the specific example of production mode AE. It is the time chart which showed the specific example 3B in Embodiment 3 of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the distraction effect which concerns on the modification 4. It is a time chart with which it uses for description of FIG. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the character announcement effect 1 which concerns on the modification 5. FIG. It is a figure where it uses for description of the character announcement effect 2 which concerns on the modification 5. FIG. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the character announcement effect 3 which concerns on the modification 5. FIG. It is a figure where it uses for description of the character announcement effect 4 which concerns on the modification 5. FIG. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the character announcement effect which concerns on the modification 5. FIG. It is a figure where it uses for description of the special display announcement effect pattern which concerns on the modification 5. FIG. It is the figure which showed the specific example regarding the special display advance notice subject which concerns on the modification 5. FIG.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

<List of Embodiments: FIG. 24>
Embodiments of the present invention include those of Embodiments 1 to 6, depending on the type of bullet ball game machine in which the guidance information display is switched from right-handed to left-handed. This is shown as a list in FIG. Embodiment 1 (section a in FIG. 24) relates to a gaming machine referred to as “immediate fall type”, and embodiment 2 (sections b to c in FIG. 24) is referred to as “probable fall type 1” in this specification. The game machines that are classified and the third embodiment (sections d to e in FIG. 24) relate to game machines that are classified as “probability fall type 2” in this specification. Further, the fourth embodiment (section f in FIG. 24) relates to gaming machines classified as “ST machine type” in the present specification, and the fifth embodiment (sections g to h in FIG. 24) is described in this specification. According to the gaming machine classified as “type including jackpot with electric support (electric chew support)” and the sixth embodiment (section i in FIG. 24), It relates to gaming machines that are classified as “types that include jackpots”.

  The above-mentioned immediate fall type, probability variation fall type 1, and probability variation fall type 2 are the specified number of times that the variation number allowing the probability variation state is long (if the probability variation state continues, it is almost certainly a big hit during the certain variation state) The number of times that can be won is set as, for example, 10,000 times. Therefore, focusing on this point, it can be classified as the ST machine type. The same applies to the case of handling “probability big hit” in the categories g to h “type including big hit with electric support” in FIG. In addition, when setting it as a probable variation state, it can also set infinity instead of 10,000 times.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, Embodiments 1 to 6 will be described in order focusing on Embodiment 1.

<Embodiment 1>
<1. Outline of configuration: FIGS. 1 and 2>
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the outline | summary of a structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1, the structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game is stored in a game board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted, and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is faced to the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting a transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When the key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the glass door 6 is locked to the front frame 2. When operated to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is disposed below the glass door 6. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

  The upper tray unit 8 includes a ball removal button 14 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the pachinko hall island facility side. On the other hand, a ball lending button 11 for requesting payout of a game ball and a card return button 12 for requesting return of a valuable medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

  The upper tray unit 8 is configured so that a player can operate, and is used when a specific effect (for example, player participation type effect) is changed before and after the operation. ), A “frame effect button 13” that is used as a second effect button (rotating lamp button) and a third effect button (rolling button) is provided. For example, the frame effect button 13 can be operated (input can be accepted) during a specific effect or during a specific period, and the operation can be changed during the operation possible period (during the input reception period). It works as “production operation means” to bring

  A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. Speakers 46 that produce sound effects (sound effects) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15. In addition, a plurality of decorative lamps 45 that provide a light effect by decoration of light are provided at various locations on the glass door 6.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the figure, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 that guides the launched game ball as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed. It is a game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

  In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) A liquid crystal display device 36 (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is provided that is capable of variable display and stop display of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and right symbol (corresponding to the right display area). It has been. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of an effect control unit 24 described later.

  Further, a center decoration 48 is provided in the game area 3a so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a distant manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and is a member that enables the flow path of game balls to be distributed to the left and right according to the strength or stroke length of the game balls. Acts as a channel distribution means). In the present embodiment, the game ball 3 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area 3a so that the flow path of the game ball is formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) of the game area 3a due to the presence of the center decoration 48. However, in the case of this embodiment, the center ornament 48 has a shape bulging slightly to the right.

  The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and forms a front mounting plate 48a that is fixed to the game board 3 by a fixing screw or the like, and forms an outer periphery of the center decoration 48, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. An armor frame portion 48b surrounding the screen is integrally provided. The armor frame portion 48b protrudes substantially from the front mounting plate 48a to the front side, and prevents the game ball from entering the inside, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36 side. A play area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side. The game balls driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left down flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 and the right down flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either. Such a center ornament 48 functions as a game ball drop direction changing member (drop direction changing means) that changes the fall direction of the game ball.

  Although not shown in the figure, the center decoration 48 is provided with a game ball that is entered from a entrance (not shown) provided on the left side of the armor frame 48b at the front lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the horizontal direction. The stage is provided so that it can freely roll and drop from the center in the left-right direction (starting port guide path) or from both the left and right sides. In addition, the center ornament 48 is provided with a movable body accessory (a clock board 81, a flower-shaped accessory 90, etc., which will be described later) that has a visual effect according to its operation mode.

  In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a function display section, and a 7-segment display (with dots) is started with the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and the lower start. A special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) which are arranged side by side in correspondence with the mouth 35 (for the second special symbol). Is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of “special symbol” expressed by 7 segments (variation display operation in which variation start and variation stop are set as one set). It has become. The liquid crystal display device 36 is a device that displays a decorative symbol by image in a synchronized manner in time with the variation display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. At the same time, a decorative symbol variation display game is executed (details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  In the various function display units, a composite display device (holding composite display LED display) 38c including a 7-segment display (with dots) is disposed next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The combination was called the display of the number of balls with special action 1, the number of balls with special action 2, the number of balls with special action 2, the variable time shortening function is active (short time), and the high probability state (high probability) This is because it is an on-hold / short-time / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “composite display device”) having five display functions called status notification.

  The various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In this normal symbol display device 39a, a normal symbol change display operation expressed by two LEDs (for example, seesaw is alternately turned on and off alternately, and it is determined whether or not it is stopped by either side being lit). As a result, the normal symbol variation display game is executed. In addition, a round number display device 39b in which three LEDs (first to third round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a is provided.

  Below the center decoration 48, an upper start port 34 (first special symbol start port: first starter) and a lower start port 35 (second special symbol starter: second starter) are provided. The normal variation winning device 41 is provided at the top and bottom, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start opening sensor 34a and lower start opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) for detecting the passage of the game ball are formed inside each. ing.

  The upper start port 34 which is the first special symbol start port is a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 1”) in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device). This is a prize winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation of the variable display operation in some cases, which is abbreviated as “Special Figure 1”, and does not have a starting opening / closing means (means for opening or expanding the starting opening). It is configured as a winning device. In the present embodiment, a game ball dropping direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a is operated to the upper start port 34 to the left-down flow path 3b. The game balls that have flowed down the game are easy to win, whereas the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c have a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to win.

  The normal variation winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variation type winning device that can vary the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port by means of the starting port opening / closing means, and specifically, a second special symbol starting port. A certain lower starting port 35 is configured as a so-called “electric tulip type” winning device including a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that can be opened or enlarged. The lower start opening 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 2”) in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). The award area relating to the start condition of the variable display operation of the variable display operation of the lower start opening 35 is determined according to the operating state (operating or non-operating) of the movable blade piece 47. It is converted into an open state (easy winning state) that facilitates winning and a closed state (difficulty state that makes winning difficult) or impossible to win than the open state. In the present embodiment, when the movable blade piece 47 is inactive, a closed state (a state in which a prize cannot be awarded) in which a prize cannot be awarded to the lower start port 35 is maintained.

  On both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are four general winning ports 43, three on the left side and one on the right side, and a total of four general winning ports for detecting the passage of game balls. A sensor 43a (see FIG. 3) is formed.

  Further, a normal symbol start opening 37 including a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally right above the normal variation winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. . The normal symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) is a winning port related to a normal symbol variation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39a, and a normal symbol starting port for detecting a passing game ball is provided therein. A sensor 37a (see FIG. 3) is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be formed only in the left flow path 3b, or may be formed in each of both flow paths.

  In the middle of the path from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow path 3c, a special variable winning that is configured such that the big winning port 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable opening door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a special winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 50 is formed therein.

  Around the big prize opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. Yes. And if the big prize opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the big prize opening closed state), by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55, the downstream guide part ( A part of the upper side 55a) is formed. In the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely in the game area above the big winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. 51d is provided so as to move the flowing game balls toward the big prize opening 50.

  The process of entering a game ball into the big prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 projects on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. Come down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, and thereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the big prize opening 50 (downward direction). At this time, if the special winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the special winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on the special winning opening in a predetermined arrangement (not shown). By the game nail, it is led in the direction of the tulip-type normal variation winning device 41 (lower start opening 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (start opening open state), a game ball can win the lower start opening 35. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the special winning opening 50 is open (large winning opening opened state), the game ball is guided into the special winning opening 50. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the special variable prize winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult to be guided to the mouth 34 side or is not guided. Therefore, in the “large winning opening closed state”, it is difficult or impossible to win the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable blade 47 of the normal variation winning apparatus 41 is operated.

  When the winning means described above belong to which of the left and right flow paths, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can be won, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b Has a top start port 34, a bottom start port 35, and three general winning ports 43 on the left side. The winning means belonging to the right flow down path 3c include the top start port 34, the bottom start port 35, and the normal symbol start port. 37, a large winning opening 50, and one general winning opening 43 on the right side.

  As long as the lower start port 35 is in a state in which the movable blade piece 47 is open (start port open state), it belongs to both the left flow down route 3b and the right flow down route 3c, and a prize can be won from either the left or right flow down route. It has become. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 has the operating condition for the passage (winning) of the game ball to the normal symbol start opening 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, it is substantially the right flow It can be said that it belongs only to the path 3c. In addition, the upper start port 34 belongs to the left flow path 3b or only the left flow path 3b, and it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball from the right flow path 3c. That is, the arrangement of the game nail and other game parts in the game area 3a is the same as that of the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b (including the game ball that has passed through the stage of the center decoration 48). However, the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c are arranged so as to form a guide path in which it is difficult or impossible to guide the game ball to the upper start opening 34. Further, the big winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game balls from the right flow path 3c can win.

  Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the big winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a. The detection switch (winning detection switch) such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the large winning opening sensor 52a, or the general winning opening sensor 43a is a game that has entered the winning means. It functions as a winning detection means for detecting a ball.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning holes provided in the gaming area 3a, if there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37, it is promised for each winning opening. The number of winning balls per winning ball (for example, 3 for the upper start opening 34 or the lower starting opening 35, 13 for the large winning opening 50, 10 for the general winning opening 43) is the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 3)). Note that the game balls that have not won each winning opening are discharged from the gaming area 3 a through the out opening 49. Here, “winning” is not a structure in which a winning opening takes a game ball inside, or a winning opening takes a gaming ball inside, but a winning opening made of a pass-through gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning slot, a winning prize is displayed at the winning slot. It is treated as having occurred. The game ball related to the winning is also referred to as “winning ball”.

<Moving object>
In the area of the game board, a plurality of movable objects that provide visual effects are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the flow of the game ball. In this example, a first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory) 80 is disposed at an upper right side in the center ornament 48, that is, at a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c. A second movable body accessory (flower type accessory 90) is arranged on the side. A third movable body accessory (semi-transparent spherical movable body 73 containing the rotating lamp 62 and the light emitting device) is integrally incorporated in the frame effect button 13 so as to be swingable and rotatable. The frame effect button 13 is either a normal button 13A (first effect button) or a rotary lamp button 66 (second effect button: 2nd effect button :) depending on the stationary orientation of the built-in movable body 73 (position of the surface visible to the player). When the movable body 73 is rotating forward, it functions as a refreshing button 70 (third effect button: rolling button). The refreshing button (rolling button) 70 has a structure in which the movable body 73 is incorporated in the push button type cylinder 72 or below it so as to be rotatable and rollable. Function. These movable body actors operate in specific effects (for example, pseudo-ream effects, reach effects, etc.), and are used as effect means for raising the sense of expectation of winning a big hit.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment receives an effect control command from the main control unit (main control means) 20 that performs overall game operation control and the main control unit 20, and receives images, light, and sound. A production control unit (production control unit) 24 for overall control of production operation control (production appearance control for production unit), a payout control board (payout control unit) 29 for performing prize ball payout control, and an external power source A power supply board (power supply control means) 31 that generates and supplies power necessary for the gaming machine from (not shown) is mainly configured. In addition, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. In FIG. 3, the power supply route is omitted.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), a ROM 202 (main control ROM), and a RAM 203 (main control RAM). As a whole, a microcomputer (equivalent to a Z80 system) ).

  The ROM 202 functions as storage means (main control side storage means) for storing game data related to game operation control, and stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. ing. The RAM 203 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for the progress of the game is stored and used according to the processing state. The RAM 203 functions as a random number counter used for a specific lottery (for example, a variation pattern lottery related to a special symbol), and functions as a random number generating means for generating a random number in software.

  Although not shown in the figure, the main control unit 20 provides a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit), which gives a periodic interrupt, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) and a time measurement function to the Z80 system, and a CPU. It also has an interrupt controller circuit, a counter circuit, etc. that exhibit an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt that gives an interrupt signal. The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number within a certain range in hardware, and a sampling circuit that samples a random value from the random number generation circuit at a predetermined timing, and as a whole a 16-bit counter work. The CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, thereby obtaining the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random value (random number size: 65536), and winning the random value Use for lottery.

  The main control unit 20 detects the passage of the upper start opening 34a for detecting the winning to the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening sensor 35a for detecting the winning to the lower start opening 35, and the normal symbol start opening 37. The normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning at the big winning opening 50, the general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 43, and the illegal act on the pachinko gaming machine 1 ( A fraud detection sensor 99 for detecting a goto action) is connected, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these.

  Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening and closing of the open door 52b of the large winning opening 50. And the main control unit 20 can transmit control signals for controlling them.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a special symbol display device 38a and a special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbol. The main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39a, and can transmit a control signal for display control of the normal symbol.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a composite display device 38c and a round number display device 39b. The main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of information displayed on the main control unit 20. . Round number display device 39b

  Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a frame external concentration terminal board 21, and the main control unit 20 provides information on the game progress (for example, jackpot winning information, prize ball number information, symbol variation display game execution number information, etc.). Can be transmitted to the hall computer HC installed outside the gaming machine via the frame external concentration terminal board 21.

  The main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information related to the special symbol variation display game and information related to errors to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. Such a production control command from the main control unit 20 is produced by one-way communication in order to prevent an illegal signal due to an external goto action from being input to the main control unit 20 via the production control unit 24. It is transmitted to the control unit 24.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a payout control board (payout control part) 29. The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control part) 28 for controlling the launching device 32, and a game ball payout. Is connected to a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19. The main control unit 20 can send a payout control command (a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29. The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, award ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and transmission of a payout state signal to the main control unit 20. Etc.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a payout control board (payout control part) 29. The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control part) 28 for controlling the launching device 32, and a game ball payout. Is connected to a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19. The main control unit 20 can send a payout control command (a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29. The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, and to control a prize ball payout of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command (control of a payout motor that drives the ball payout mechanism unit). ), Sending out a payout state signal to the main control unit 20.

  Further, the dispensing control board 29 can transmit a firing control signal to the firing control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization to a launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the launch control signal, and realizes a game ball launch operation by operating the launch operation handle 15. .

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 includes a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), and is mainly configured by a microcomputer with a ROM 242 (production control ROM) and a RAM 243 (production control RAM). An interrupt controller circuit having an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a sound source IC, CTC, and timer interrupt, a counter circuit for generating random numbers in hardware, and the like are provided. The ROM 242 functions as storage means (effect control side storage means) for storing game data related to effect operation control, and stores various data necessary for effect operation control in addition to the effect control program in which the effect control procedure is described. Has been. Further, the RAM 243 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for producing an effect is stored and used according to the processing state. The RAM 203 functions as a random number counter for effect lottery random numbers used for effect lottery, and functions as a random number generating means for generating random numbers in software.

  The main roles of the production control unit 24 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection of production based on production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, decorative lamps. 45, light emission control of various LEDs (production LED: not shown), operation control of a movable body accessory, and the like.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display control of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is an image ROM storing VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image development processing. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. A liquid crystal control ROM that stores the described program and various data necessary for display control thereof, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory are mainly configured.

  In addition, the production control unit 24 displays a variety of productions (light production, sound production, and movable body production), a decorative lamp 45, a clock panel (number display unit) 81 of the clock-type accessory 80, and various LEDs. A light display control unit for the light display device 45a including the sound, a sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generation device 46a including the speaker 46, various movable body objects (clock-type object 80, flower-type object 90, rotating lamp 62, a movable body 73, etc.) for driving the movable body accessory motors 61, 61a, 61b, 63 and the like. Here, the movable body accessory motor 61 is for driving the clock hands 82 constituting the clock-type accessory 80, and the movable body accessory motors 61 a, 61 b are for driving the movable bodies 91, 92 constituting the flower-shaped accessory 90. The movable body accessory motor 63 is for driving the reflecting mirror 62 b constituting the rotating lamp 62, and the movable body accessory motor 73 a is for driving the movable body 73 constituting the rolling button 70. The effect control unit 24 can transmit control signals related to the effect means to these drive control units.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection switch 97 for the clock hand 82 and position detection switches 97a and 97b for the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 of the flower-shaped accessory 90. 24 can receive detection signals from these. The effect control unit 24 controls the operation mode while monitoring the current operation position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position) of the movable body accessory based on the detection signals from the position detection switches 97, 97a, 97b. In addition, the malfunction of the movable body accessory (whether or not it is a normal operation (for example, whether or not it has correctly returned to the origin position after the operation)) is monitored.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to switches of the first and second effect buttons that can be operated by the player, that is, the switch of the frame effect button 13 and the rotary lamp switch 65. The effect control unit 24 is connected to these effect buttons. The operation detection signals from 13A and 66 can be received.

  The effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, and controls various effect means at a necessary timing. To do. Thereby, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting and blinking driving of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized. The production of “production scenarios” in a broad sense is realized.

  The effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and an event (EVENT) of 1-byte length. In order to distinguish MODE from EVENT, MODE Bit 7 is Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time elapses from this setting. The strobe signal is transmitted. Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after the elapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second time of the strobe signal is transmitted after the elapse of the predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (production control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process executed periodically). Even in such a case, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs simultaneously.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a gaming operation related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol change display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, the main control unit 20 The “big hit lottery” is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner to start the special symbol variation display game. Derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

  Here, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning to the upper start opening 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning to the lower start opening 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the big hit lottery result regarding the upper start port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hit lottery result regarding the lower start port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that a game ball has entered the upper start opening 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that a game ball has entered the lower start opening 35, the special symbol 2 is variably displayed and the second special symbol variation display game is started. . Then, when the special symbol variation display game in the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, if the big win lottery result is “big hit” after the predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the predetermined “big hit” is given. In this mode, in other cases, the special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a predetermined “losing” mode, whereby the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived and displayed.

  In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variation display game is referred to as “special symbol variation display game 2”. Unless otherwise required, “special symbol 1” and “special symbol 2” are simply referred to as “special symbols” (sometimes abbreviated as “special symbol”), and “special symbol variation display game 1” and “special symbol” The symbol variation display game 2 ”is simply referred to as“ special symbol variation display game ”.

  When the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, a decorative symbol (proactive game symbol) is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to start the decorative symbol variation display game. Various effects are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorated design is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning ornamental symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

  Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game is “big hit” (when the big hit lottery result is “hit”), the decoration symbol variation display game develops an effect reflecting the result. In the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol is a big hit (for example, the 7-segment display state is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”, “right”. In each display area of “”, the display pattern in which the decorative symbol reflects “big hit” (for example, in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” display areas, the three decorative symbols are “7”, “7”, “ 7 ”display state).

  When this “big hit” is reached, specifically, the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated accordingly. As a result, the symbol pattern of “hit” is derived and displayed. Thereafter, the special prize opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable prize-winning device 52 is actuated to open and close the open door 52b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby opening and closing the special prize opening 50, and from the normal gaming state. However, a special game state (big hit game) advantageous to the player occurs. In this jackpot game, the number of game balls that have won a prize at the big prize opening (the big prize opening) until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example) elapses by the opening door 52b. 50 (the number of winning balls) is a predetermined number (maximum number of winnings: the maximum number of winning balls allowed for an opened winning opening is increased by one operation of an accessory: for example, 9) Until the value reaches the predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 15 rounds) where the winning area is opened or expanded and the big winning opening is closed when either of these conditions is met. Round) repeated. The condition for closing the special winning opening 50 is not limited to this, and it may be based only on the opening time of the special winning opening or only based on the number of game balls won in the special winning opening. Also good.

  When the jackpot game is started, an opening effect is provided to notify that the jackpot is first started. After the opening effect is finished, the round game is performed one or more times up to a predetermined number of rounds. . Then, after the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending effect for notifying that the jackpot is finished is performed, and thereby the jackpot game is finished. That is, the jackpot game is roughly composed of game periods of an opening effect, a round game, and an ending effect. However, the round game execution period excluding the opening effect period and the ending effect period in the closed state of the big prize opening may be regarded as a big hit game period.

  Regarding the information necessary for the execution of the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 is based on the fact that a game ball enters (wins) the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35. Whether the game is detected by the upper start sensor 34a or the lower start sensor 35a and the start condition (the start condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied, whether the game is “big hit” or “lost” 'Lottery lottery (win / fail type lottery)', and if it is a 'big hit', the big hit type is drawn, and if it is' losing ', the lottery type is lottered' symbol lottery (win (winning) type lottery) (If there is only one type of loss, there is no need to perform a lottery for the type of loss, so the lottery can be omitted). Based on the lottery result information, N'ya, a final decision special symbols to be stopped and displayed (special stop symbol). Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a “variation pattern designation command” including at least a special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result and the special symbol variation time) is provided to the effect control unit 24 side. Send. Thereby, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, in order to enrich the production variations, a “decorative design designation command” including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information (information on the hit type)) is also transmitted to the production control unit 24. ing.

  In addition to the jackpot lottery result information, the special symbol variation pattern information may include information for designating the occurrence of a specific notice effect (a reach effect described later, a pseudo-ream effect, etc.). To explain in detail, according to the big hit lottery result information, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly divided into a “hit fluctuation pattern” in the case of a win and a “lack fluctuation pattern” in the case of a loss. For example, a change pattern for specifying a reach effect (reach change pattern) that specifies the occurrence of reach effects, a change pattern for specifying a non-reach effect (normal change pattern) that does not specify the occurrence of reach effects, a pseudo-continuous effect and a reach effect Reach fluctuation pattern for specifying pseudo-continuous production (reach fluctuation pattern with pseudo-continuous production) that specifies combined generation with, and normal fluctuation pattern for specifying pseudo-continuous production that specifies the generation of pseudo-continuous production and does not specify the occurrence of reach production (Normal variation pattern with pseudo-continuations) and the like can be included. Note that the reach variation pattern and the pseudo-variable variation pattern are basically set so that the variation time is longer than that of the normal variation pattern because of designating an effect that makes a big hit winning expectation. .

  The effect control unit 24 performs time series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. Deciding the contents to be developed (effect scenario) and the decoration pattern (decoration stop pattern) to be finally stopped and displayed, and the decoration pattern fluctuation display game by changing the decoration symbols according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbols Is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols by the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronism with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game are in progress. Are substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of the image (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED, etc. are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the passing (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37, “main lottery” is performed by the random number lottery in the main control unit 20. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol displayed on the LED is displayed in a normal symbol display device 39a in a variable manner to start a normal symbol variation display game. After a certain period of time, the result is converted into a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. And stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is “per assistance”, the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is turned on in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are on, or “O” and “ The display is stopped when the “○” side LED among the LEDs representing “x” is in a lighting state).

  When this "subsidiary hit" is reached, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is actuated, thereby opening the movable blade 47 in a reverse "C" shape and opening the lower start port 35. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to enter a state in which the game ball is likely to flow in (opening opening state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as “general power open game”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this open electric game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 won the open time of the lower start opening 35 until a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds) elapses or the lower start opening 35 was won. Until the number of game balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 4), the winning area is opened or expanded, and when one of these conditions is satisfied, the lower start opening 35 is closed a predetermined number of times (for example, , Up to 2 times). The condition for closing the lower start opening 35 is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the lower start opening, or only based on the number of game balls won in the lower start opening. Also good. In addition, for each assistance, a plurality of types of assistances with different opening times and / or number of times of opening of the lower start opening 35 may be defined as the open mode of the electric train.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the special / decorative symbol variation display game, during the regular symbol variation display game, during the big hit game, or during the open-circuit game, the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35 or the normal symbol start port 37, when a winning occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start sensor 34a, the lower start sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start sensor 37a, and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied As a data relating to the right to start the variable display game, except for the data related to the variable display, the maximum storage number (for example, a maximum of four) which is a predetermined upper limit value is reserved and stored. . The on-hold hold data that has not been subjected to the symbol variation display operation or a game ball related to the hold data is also referred to as an “operation hold ball”. In order to clarify the number of the operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a holding provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Turn on the indicator.

  Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls relating to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol are each stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are held as the fixed number of times of change of the special symbol or the normal symbol. In addition, the maximum memory number (maximum reserved memory number) of the number of the operation holding balls regarding the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited, and a part or all of the maximum reserved memory number of each symbol is different. (For example, the maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 1 side is 4, the maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 2 side is 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the normal symbol side is 6, etc.). Moreover, regarding the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the symbol side where the profit obtained by the big hit lottery is relatively high may be set. In the present embodiment, since the jackpot lottery related to the special symbol 2 can obtain a jackpot type that is relatively profitable for the player, for example, the maximum number of reserved memory on the special symbol 1 side is two, the special symbol 2 side The maximum number of reserved memories may be set to 4 more than that.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the jackpot that is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a “probability variation (hereinafter, abbreviated as“ probability variation ”) function” that the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) serves as a function unit. There are two types, a probability changing function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol probability changing function”) and a probability changing function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol probability changing function”).

  The special symbol probability changing function changes the probability of winning a big hit from a low probability (for example, 1/397) of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, 1/3 of 19.7). Is a function that generates an advantageous “high probability state”. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability changing function is in operation, the big hit lottery probability is high, so that the big hit is likely to occur. Therefore, it can be said that the gaming state expected by the player is a gaming state in which this special symbol probability changing function is operating. The details of the operation start condition and the operation end condition of the special symbol probability changing function will be described later.

  The normal symbol probability changing function changes the low probability (for example, 2/256) from the low probability (for example, 2/256) that the lottery probability per auxiliary is a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a higher probability (for example, 255/256) than the normal gaming state. This is a function for generating an advantageous “probability change state per auxiliary”. Under the game state in which this normal symbol probability changing function is operating (probability per assist change state), since the lottery probability per auxiliary is in a high probability state, auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and open-game games frequently occur. Thus, the operating rate is improved so that the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol probability changing function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol time-shortening function described later, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time-shortening function. This is the same condition as the operation end condition.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a “variable time reduction (hereinafter referred to as“ time reduction ”) function” that the main control unit 20 takes on as a function unit. There are two types of time-shortening functions relating to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol time-shortening functions”) and time-shortening functions relating to ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol time-shortening functions”).

  The special symbol time reduction function shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is fixedly displayed (average fluctuation time of the special symbol)). This is a function that generates a special symbol short-time state. Under the gaming state in which the special symbol time reduction function is activated (special symbol short time state), the average variation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for the variation without reach) Is reduced from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), a lottery number improvement state is achieved in which the number of big lotteries per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the special symbol short-time state does not occur, Control processing (for example, a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) described later, the number of suspended balls, etc.).

  The normal symbol time shortening function is the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from the start of normal symbols to the final display (average fluctuation time of normal symbols)) This is a function to generate a shortened "normal symbol time short state". Under the game state in which the normal symbol short-time function is activated (normal symbol short-time state), the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, from 10 seconds to 1 second). In other words, the number of lotteries is improved so that the number of lotteries per auxiliary time per unit time is improved as compared with the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the normal symbol short-time state does not occur. This is due to the control process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol short-time function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol short-time function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol short-time function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions.

  Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 serves as a function unit.

  The open extension function is a function for generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (at least one of the opening time and the number of opening times of the movable blade piece 47) of the movable blade piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 is extended. is there. This open extended state is referred to as a “state with electric Chu support” or an “electric Chu support state”. Under the gaming state (open extended state) in which the open extension function is operating, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.2 seconds to 1.7 seconds, for example. The number of times of opening and closing is extended, for example, from once (when the opening extension function is not in operation) to twice (when the opening extension function is in operation), and the movable wing piece 47 per unit time than in the normal gaming state. The operating rate is improved so that the operating rate is improved. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the opening extension function is the same condition as the operation start condition of the special symbol time shortening function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time shortening function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions. Therefore, during the open extended state, the normal symbol probability changing function and the normal symbol time-shortening function also act, so that a gaming state in which the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is remarkably improved occurs.

  By operating one or more types of the functions as described above, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. Here, in this embodiment, the operation start conditions of the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function, so each function operates at the same opportunity. Will do. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability changing function, the special symbol time shortening function, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time shortening function, and the open extension function are referred to as “probability changing state”. A gaming state from which the special symbol probability changing function is removed is referred to as a “short-time state”, and a gaming state in which only the special symbol probability changing function is activated is referred to as a “latent probability varying state (latent probability or latent probability state)”, and not all functions are in operation. The (non-operating) state is referred to as “normal gaming state”. Therefore, when paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, if the gaming state is “short-time state” or “normal gaming state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “low probability state” and the gaming state becomes “latency probability”. In the case of “state” or “probability change state”, the jackpot lottery probability becomes a “high probability state”. In addition, during the big hit related to the condition device operation, a winning game is generated when the big prize opening is opened and closed, but all the functions are deactivated for the above functions, and basically the same gaming state as the normal gaming state described above Placed below.

(3-2-1. High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol short-time function, and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function. Will operate at the same opportunity. However, when attention is paid to the normal symbol probability changing function, the normal symbol time-shortening function, and the open extension function, respectively, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operating rate of the movable blade piece 47 is improved. Since the operating rate is improved and the winning frequency at the lower start opening 35 is increased, the gaming condition is that the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the big win lottery result is higher than the normal gaming state. "Base gaming state (starting condition improved state)". The “high base gaming state” here refers to a gaming state when a function relating to a normal symbol is activated, and a function relating to a special symbol, that is, at least one of a special symbol probability changing function and a special symbol time-shortening function is activated. It is different from the game state when doing.

  On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to special symbols (special symbol probability changing function and special symbol short-time function) individually, when the above special symbol probability changing function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes “high probability state” which is higher than the normal gaming state. When the special symbol short-time function is activated, the special symbol variation display game has a “special symbol short-time state” in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is earlier than the normal gaming state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the “high base gaming state” in which the starting frequency of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, as an example of the “high base game state”, an electric chew support state to which at least an extension function is provided is treated as a “high base game state”. Under the electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normally variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Therefore, the game state is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the electronic chew support state is not set (low base game state). When paying attention to the presence or absence of this electric chew support, when the game state is “normal game state” or “latent probability state”, it becomes “no electric chew support state” (hereinafter also referred to as “no electric support state”). When the gaming state is “time-short state” or “probability change state”, the state is “a state with electric chew support (hereinafter also referred to as“ electric support state ”)”. In addition, the gaming state that pays attention to the operating status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support Is referred to as “internal gaming state”. “Game state determination number (YJ)” is provided as data for identifying the internal game state.

  As a hit type described later, for convenience of explanation, the big hit that triggers the transition to the probable change state is the “probable big hit”, the big hit that triggers the transition to the short-time state is the “short-time big hit”, and the transition trigger to the latent state The big hit that becomes a “latent big hit” is called a “big hit” that triggers the transition to the normal state. Also, a big hit that triggers a transition to a gaming state (at least a probability change state or a short time state) with at least a high base state is called a “big hit with electric support”, and a gaming state without a high base state (latent probability state or normal gaming state) The jackpot that triggers the transition to is sometimes referred to as “jackpot without power support”.

  Here, in order to realize various effects related to the above-mentioned internal gaming state, a “variation pattern selection mode (hereinafter referred to as“ variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) ”)” described later is used, Can be further classified and managed. For example, for the above “probability change state (low probability / no electric support)”, a plurality of kinds of probability change states such as “probability change A”, “probability change B”, and “probability change C” are set and managed as different game states. be able to. Specifically, the operational status of each function (special symbol probability changing function, special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol probability changing function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support, etc. When paying attention to the “gaming state”, the game patterns (probability variation A ”,“ probability variation B ”, and“ probability variation C ”), which are the same“ probability variation state ”, with respect to the variation pattern of the special symbol, A target variation pattern can be selected from among unique variation pattern types (one or a plurality of variation patterns) corresponding to a specified number (Tcode). Also, due to this, on the side of the production control unit 24, production modes corresponding to the respective game states of “probability change A”, “probability change B”, and “probability change C” are provided, and effects under these effect modes are generated. (Details of the effect mode will be described later). As a result, even under the same internal gaming state, a special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern selection mode can be selected. Therefore, the variation time (game digestion time) of the symbol variation display game, A big change can be brought about in related production. For convenience of explanation, unless otherwise required, the “internal game state” and the “game state (variation pattern distribution designation number ( Tcode)) ”may be simply referred to as“ gaming state ”without distinction.

  The “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” is used as data for identifying the current gaming state. When selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol, the jackpot lottery result and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) are referred to, and a desired variation pattern corresponding to the current gaming state is selected. (See step S412 (special symbol variation pattern creation processing) in FIG. 12 described later). For example, in the case of the ST machine type of the fourth embodiment described later (section f in FIG. 24), “normal (normal state)” is displayed during the ST period when the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) is “00H”. In the case of “01H” in the internal game state (probability change state), “first half of ST (probability change)” is set, “second half of ST (probability change)” is set in “02H”, and “03H” is set in “ “ST final (probability change)” is set such that “04H” indicates CZ, and “05H” indicates “latent probability state”. In this way, by using different values as the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode), the same probability variation state is divided into a plurality of types of probability variation states, “first ST”, “second ST” and “last ST”. These can be managed as sections of different production modes. Therefore, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is not necessarily changed with the change of the internal gaming state, but is changed when a predetermined gaming state changing condition is satisfied. In this respect, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is different from data that is changed with a change in the internal gaming state, such as a “gaming state determination number (YJ)” that identifies the internal gaming state itself.

<4. About winning>
Next, “winning” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

(4-1. Per category: Fig. 4)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs a big hit lottery (win lottery) for multiple types of hits. This hit type is different between the case of the special symbol 1 and the case of the special symbol 2. As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the hit types for special symbol 1 are “15R long open probability variation big hit”, “2R short open latent big hit”, and “small hit”. As shown in FIG. 4 (b), the winning type is only “15R long open probability variation big hit”.

  Among these hits, big hits such as “15R long open probability variable big hit” and “2R short open latent big hit (2R latent big hit)” are hits belonging to the “big hit” type that triggers the operation of the condition device, The “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type that does not trigger the operation of the condition device. Here, the “condition device” is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, in which a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or a game ball is displayed. The one that operates when it passes a specific area in the big prize opening. Each of the hits belonging to the above-mentioned “big hit” type and the hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type (small hits) both have an opportunity to shift to a special gaming state (winning game) with opening / closing operation of the big prize opening (occurrence trigger) It is a hit. Therefore, hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type are different from simple “losing”.

  Among the hits belonging to the above-mentioned "big hit" type, "15R long open probability change big hit (15R positive change big hit)" and "2R short open latent big hit" are accompanied by at least a high probability state of the gaming state after the big hit game ends. The jackpot type belongs to the “probability big hit” to be shifted to the privilege game state (in this embodiment, the probability change state or the latent probability state). The “small hit” is a hit type for continuing the gaming state at the time of winning. The “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type, but for convenience of explanation, unless otherwise necessary, it is treated as one of the big hit types in the same row without being distinguished from the above big hit.

  When one of the above-mentioned jackpots is won, the special symbol reflecting the lottery result is displayed as it is for the special symbol in the special symbol display device 38. That is, the special symbol display device 38 displays a special symbol for notifying a probable big hit, a special symbol for notifying a loss, or a special symbol for notifying a small hit. On the other hand, a symbol game corresponding to the special symbol variation display game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 using another symbol called a decorative symbol.

(4-2. Per game)
Next, the winning game based on each hit described above will be described.

(4-2-1.15R long opening chance change hit game)
A winning game with a 15R long open probability variable jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “15R probability variable big hit game”) is a big hit with a prescribed number of rounds of 15 rounds. In this embodiment, the winning prize port 50 in one round game is The maximum opening time is set to “29.8 seconds” of “long opening time”. The open / close pattern in which the maximum open time is set to the “long open time” is referred to as a “long open pattern”. Here, the “long open time” means that there is a possibility that the number of winnings in the big winning opening within the time will reach the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) (the possibility of reaching the maximum number of winnings is sufficient). It is determined as a time span.

  After the round game is started and the grand prize opening 50 is opened, when the above maximum opening time elapses, the big prize opening 50 is closed and the current round game is finished, and the prescribed round number of 15 rounds is reached. If not, after a predetermined time (interval between rounds) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. However, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, if the number of game balls (the number of winning balls) won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, nine), the big winning opening 50 is closed. After the current round game is over and a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. In other words, if the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed, or if the number of game balls won in the grand prize opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the opened big prize opening will be met Is closed and the game is shifted to the next round game with a predetermined interval time between them (the same applies to the case of “2R short open latency big hit” described later).

  After the round game is started and the grand prize opening 50 is opened, when the above maximum opening time elapses, the big prize opening 50 is closed and the current round game is finished, and the prescribed round number of 15 rounds is reached. If not, after a predetermined time (interval between rounds) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. However, even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, if the number of game balls (the number of winning balls) won in the big winning opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number (for example, nine), the big winning opening 50 is closed. After the current round game is over and a predetermined time (inter-round interval time) has elapsed, the next round game is entered. In other words, if the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed, or if the number of game balls won in the grand prize opening reaches the maximum number of winnings, the opened big prize opening will be met Is closed, and a transition to the next round game is made with a predetermined interval time between rounds (the same applies to the case of “2R short open latency big hit” described later). The above-mentioned “interval time between rounds” between round games is composed of “remaining ball discharge time” and “interval time before opening” after the remaining ball discharge time elapses until the next round game starts. . The “remaining ball discharge time” refers to a margin time (for example, 1980 ms) for discharging the remaining balls inside the big prize opening after the big prize opening is closed.

(4-2-2R winning game with short open latency big hit)
A winning game based on 2R short-open latency big hit (hereinafter referred to as “2R latent big hit game”) is a big hit with a prescribed number of rounds of two, and in this embodiment, a big winning opening in one round game. The maximum opening time of (big prize opening 50) is set to 0.1 seconds of “short opening time”. As described above, the opening / closing pattern in which the maximum opening time is set to the “short opening time” is referred to as a “short opening pattern”. Therefore, in the 2R latent big hit game, the winning prize opening is only opened for a short opening time (0.1 seconds), and the number of round games is as small as two rounds, so there is virtually no prize ball. (Accurately, there is a possibility of winning a big prize opening, but because the maximum opening time of the big winning opening of each round game is set to a short opening time, That is less likely).

  In addition, the hit effect during the 2R latent large hit game of the special figure 1 side (the effect that appears during the hit game) is the hit effect during the 2R short open small hit of the special figure 1 side hit type. The production is substantially the same (same or very similar). In other words, the action related to the hit game including the mid-game effect by the 2R short open latent big hit shows substantially the same behavior as the game action related to the 2R short open small hit, and either hit as seen from the player side. It is difficult or impossible to identify whether a game is being executed. As a result, even if the player wins the 2R short open small hit, the player can be given a sense of winning expectation for the “2R short open latent big hit” that triggers the transition to the high probability state. ing.

(4-2-3. Winning games with small hits)
In a hit game with small hits (hereinafter referred to as “small hit game”), the opening / closing operation of the big prize port captured from the appearance is controlled in substantially the same operation mode as that of the 2R latent big hit game. It is like that. In detail, since the “small hit” is a hit type that does not trigger the operation of the “condition device”, a round game like “big hit” is not executed. However, by controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening in substantially the same manner of operation as the 2R latent big hit game, a pseudo round game was realized, and it seemed as if the 2R short open big hit big win was won. It is possible to dress like.

  In addition, the hit effect during the small hit game is substantially the same (same or very similar) as the hit effect during the 2R latent big hit game. In other words, the action related to the small hit game including the hit effect shows substantially the same behavior as the game action related to the 2R short open latent big hit, and either the probability change or the normal hit game is seen from the player side. It is difficult or impossible to identify whether it is being executed. Thereby, even if it is a case where a small hit is won, it is possible to give a player a sense of winning expectation for a “2R short open latent big hit” that becomes a trigger for transition to a high probability state.

  In the above description, it has been described that the maximum opening time is set to the short opening time in the 2R latent big hit game and the small hit game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the same long open time as that of a 15R probability variable big hit game may be set so that a winning to the big winning opening is allowed to some extent, and it is difficult or impossible to reach the above maximum winning number. An opening time (an intermediate opening time shorter than the long opening time and longer than the short opening time: for example, 5 seconds) may be set so that the number of winning balls to the winning opening can be secured to some extent. In addition, the number of round games related to the jackpot can be determined as appropriate. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the hit types of special symbol 1 are “15R long open probability variable big hit”, “2R short open latent big hit”, and “small hit”. Although it has been described that the winning type is only “15R long open probability variation big hit”, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or a plurality of hit types can be defined as the hit types of the special symbols 1 and 2.

(4-3. Game state after winning game: FIG. 4)
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the gaming state to be transferred after each winning game will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state that shifts after each winning game. Each game state shown in the figure is not an internal game state but a game state in which attention is paid to a variation pattern selection mode (game state).

(Game state after 4-3-1.15R probable big hit game ends)
In the first embodiment, an “immediate fall type” gaming machine (FIG. 24 (a)) is handled, and after the 15R probability variable big hit game is finished, as shown in the figure, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the winning lottery The “probability change state” is transferred, and thereafter, the probability change state is continued until the falling lottery is won.

  The “falling lottery” is executed mainly in a gaming state (for example, a probability variation state or a latent probability state) with a state where a big hit lottery probability is a high probability state. When the falling lottery is won, the high probability state is terminated and the low probability state is entered. In addition, the falling lottery may be executed when “losing (may include small hits)” is won in the big hit lottery (the big hit lottery priority type), or after the falling lottery is executed, the big hit lottery is executed. Yes (falling lottery priority type). In the case of the latter falling lottery priority type, in this time the symbol variation display game, it is in a high probability state before the falling lottery execution, but it wins the falling lottery, and when the big hit lottery is executed, it is a low probability state and whether or not the big hit May be drawn. In the first to sixth embodiments, for the convenience of explanation, description will be made as a gaming machine adopting the latter falling lottery priority type.

  In the case of the above-mentioned “immediate fall type” gaming machine (FIG. 24A), if a winning lottery is won in this symbol variation display game, the high base game state (with electric support) is also terminated, and “no electric support” The game is shifted to the normal gaming state of “+ low probability state”.

(4-3-2.2R game state after the big hit game, after the small hit game)
In the case of 2R latent big hit or small hit, as shown in the figure, the game state after the end of the 2R latent big hit game and the game state after the end of the small hit game are as follows.

  After the 2R latent large hit game, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on the game state at the time of winning the win, and in this embodiment, when it is “normal state”, “CZ (latency probability)”. (The variation pattern selection mode is “CZ”, the internal game state is “latency probability state”), and if it is the latent probability state, the “latency probability state” is “CZ (normal)” (the variation pattern selection mode is “ “CZ”, the internal game state is “normal state”), “CZ (latency probability)”, and “CZ (latency probability)” is “latency probability state”, and the probability variation state. In the case of a failure, the state is shifted to a “probable change state”. If the game state at the time of winning is a latent probability state, the game may be shifted to a probability change state.

  However, while the transition control of the “internal gaming state” due to the small win is not performed, the transition control of the “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode)” related to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol (determination of the effect) is performed. Using such a transition mode, for example, when the gaming state after the small hit game and the gaming state after the 2R latent large hit game are shifted to the same gaming state, the production mode ( It is possible to generate an effect under the same effect mode as after the 2R latent probability big hit game even after the small hit game is kept in the concealment effect mode. As a result, the player can be given a sense of rushing into a high-probability state that the player may win the 2R short-release latent big hit and move to the “latent state”. ing. The “CZ” is used as a gaming state (variation pattern selection mode) for causing the concealment effect mode to appear.

  When the above “CZ (latency)” or “CZ (normal)” is reached, the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game is until a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) or within the predetermined number of times. The “CZ” continues until a big hit is made, and when the special symbol variation display game is finished without winning the falling lottery within the predetermined number of times and without a big hit being decided, the “CZ” is ended, In accordance with the internal game state, the next game shifts to a “latency state” or a “normal game state”, and the internal game state is clarified in terms of performance.

(4-3-4. Probability Falling Type 1 According to Embodiment 2 (sections b to c in FIG. 24))
In the case of “probability change fall type 1” according to the second embodiment (FIGS. 24 (b) and (c)), the probability change big win is won and the probability change state (high probability, with electric support) with the fall lottery after the big hit game ends. It is the type to migrate. After shifting to the probability change state with the falling lottery after the big hit game is over, if the falling lottery continues to be lost and the big hit cannot be made within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee, the state shifts to the “no electric support” state. Here, “electric support guarantee X times” means the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of variations of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (special symbols 1 and 2). This means that the electric support state is assured until the falling lottery is won or not until the total number of fluctuations)) reaches a predetermined upper limit number (X times). However, if the big hit is confirmed (winning) within the predetermined upper limit number of times, the power support state is guaranteed again.

  Therefore, in the probability variation state, when the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game reaches a predetermined number (here, 100 times), the electric support guarantee is completed, and thereafter, the electric probability support state remains in a high probability state, that is, “ Enter into the latent state (high probability, no electric support). If the winning lottery is won during this “latent probability state”, the game state changes from “high probability state (high probability, no electric support)” to “normal state ( Low probability, no electric support) ”.

  In addition, when the winning lottery is won during the probability change state (high probability, with electric support (electric support support 100 times)), the high probability state falls to the low probability state, but the electric support is not lost. Therefore, in this case, the state shifts from the "probable change state" to the "short-time state (low probability, with electric support)", and if the big win is not reached before the remaining electric support guarantee count is exhausted, the electric support support state ends. Then, the “short-time state” shifts to the “normal state”.

  In addition, if you win a probable big hit (for example, “15R long open probable big hit” or “2R short open probable big hit”) during the probable state of 100 electric support guarantees, you will enter the probabilistic state again after the winning game ends. . Therefore, as long as you continue to win a big hit in the high base gaming state (in the probability variation state or in the short time state) with 100 times of the above-mentioned electric support guarantee with the open extension function granted, the next time will also be 15R long under the high base gaming state You will be able to win the chances of winning big changes.

(4-3-5. Probability falling type 2 according to Embodiment 3 (sections d to e in FIG. 24))
In the case of “probability falling type 2” according to the third embodiment (FIGS. 24 (d) and (e)), as in the second embodiment, the winning combination is won for the probable variation, and after the big winning game is finished, the state is shifted to the probable variation state with the falling lottery. Type. However, in the case of the “probable fall type 2” according to the third embodiment, after shifting to the probability change state with the fall lottery, the fall lottery continues to be lost, and if the big hit is not made within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee, the fall lottery is won. The "probable change state" continues until. This is different from the second embodiment. In addition, when the winning lottery is won in the probability change state after digestion with 100 electric support guarantees, as in the “immediate falling type” of the first embodiment, the instant falling state is entered, and the symbol variation display game “normal” won in the falling lottery is selected. Transition to "state". On the other hand, if the winning lottery is won during the probability variation state during the electric support guarantee, as in the case of the “probability variation type 1” according to the above-described second embodiment, the state shifts to the short time state and digests the remaining number of electrical support operations If the big hit is not won by the end, the power support state is terminated and the state shifts from the “short time state” to the “normal state”.

(4-3-6. ST machine type according to Embodiment 4 (section f in FIG. 24))
In the case of the ST machine type according to the fourth embodiment (FIG. 24 (f)), it is a type that wins the probability change big hit and shifts to the “number of times cut probability change state (ST)” after the big hit game ends. In the case of the ST machine type according to the fourth embodiment (FIG. 24 (f)), the “probability change state” after the jackpot game ends until the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game ends a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Until the big hit is confirmed (winning) during or within the predetermined number of times, the probability variation state continues. However, if the big win is not won within the predetermined number of times, the probability change state ends and the next game shifts to the “normal state”. The ST machine type according to the fourth embodiment wins a big hit (except for “small win” which does not trigger an internal game state transition) after the game status is shifted to a gaming state in which the jackpot lottery probability is at least a high probability state. If the special symbol fluctuation display game is completed a predetermined number of times without being done, it is a “number cut probability change machine (ST machine)” that ends the high probability state and shifts the jackpot lottery probability to a low probability. It differs from the “falling type gaming machine” that falls to a low probability state by falling lottery as in the first to third embodiments. The upper limit number of the special symbol variation display game (special symbol variation frequency) in which the high probability state is continued is referred to as “specified ST number”.

  (4-3-7. Case of “type including multiple types of jackpot with electric support” according to Embodiment 5 (sections g to h in FIG. 24))

  Embodiment 5 (sections g to h in FIG. 24) relates to gaming machines classified as “a type including a plurality of types of jackpots with electric support” in the present specification. Here, as an example, a plurality of types of “types including a time-saving big hit” gaming machine that triggers a transition to a time-saving state are illustrated. In the drawing, as the time and power hit, an example in which a plurality of types of time and power hits (time to power hits A to C) having different end times of the time saving state (20 times, 30 times, and 40 times) is illustrated. In the fifth embodiment, after the big hit game is completed, the short time big hit A is the electric power guarantee guarantee (number of time reductions) 20 rotations, the short time big hit B is the electric support guarantee 30 rotations, and the short time big hit C is the electric power guarantee guarantee 40 rotations.

  In the case of the fifth embodiment, when the big hit cannot be made within the number of times of guaranteed electric support, the time reduction state ends (the “electric support present state” ends) and the state shifts to the “normal state”. Here, in the production under the production mode after the big hit game, it is preferable that at least the number of time reductions is kept in a concealed state. More preferably, it is assumed that the jackpot gaming mode and hitting performance of the jackpots A to C are the same or similar to each other, and which player wins the jackpot is made secret from the player. In this way, it is possible to avoid which time bonus is won, that is, the number of times that the power support guarantee is given (in this example, the number of time support) is not realized by the player, and to what extent the power support status is. Since the player can be expected to continue, it is possible to excite the player's gaming interest.

  In the case of the fifth embodiment, the type of jackpot with electric support may include one or a plurality of types of time-saving jackpots and one or more types of probability variation jackpots. In this case, among the big hits with electric support, it is preferable that the number of guaranteed electric support is different between the first big hit with electric support and the second big hit with electric support. It should be noted that the jackpot gaming mode (such as the number of rounds and the winning pattern opening pattern) may be the same as or different from the probability variation jackpot, and can be set as appropriate.

(4-3-8. In the case of a type including “electric support no big hit” according to Embodiment 6 (section i in FIG. 24))
Embodiment 6 (category i in FIG. 24) relates to gaming machines classified as “a type including a big hit without electric support (a type including at least a normal big hit)” in this specification.

  As long as the above-described Embodiments 1 to 6 can achieve the object of the present invention, any jackpot type may be provided. For example, in the case of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4A, the hit types in the case of the special symbol 1 are “15R long open probability variable big hit”, “2R short open latent big hit”, and “small hit”. Yes, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), the hit type in the case of special symbol 2 is only “15R long open probability variable big hit”, but is not limited to this, and the symbol of special symbol 1 or 2 The hit type may be one or more types of probability variation big hits, short-time big hits, normal big hits, or small hits.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, an effect mode (effect state) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes that provide effects related to the transition of the game state, and is configured to be able to go back and forth between the effect modes. Specifically, in the above-mentioned production mode, the “normal production mode” that produces the production related to the “normal state” stay, and the production related to this during the “CZ (CHANCE ZONE)” stay. “CZ production mode”, “Duration Probability Mode” during the “Large Probability State”, and “Category Produce Mode” during the “Probability Change State”. A plurality of types of effect modes corresponding to each gaming state are provided. In addition, during the stay in the “probability change state”, a plurality of “falling implied effect modes” are provided which provide an effect of implying a fall from the state with the electric support (probability changing state or short time state). The “CZ effect mode” or “falling suggestion effect mode” is an effect that makes the current jackpot lottery probability state (internal game state) a concealed state for the effect and gives the player an expectation of a high probability state. It works as a “secret mode”.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) includes a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) designates a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, the current gaming state (including the internal gaming state), or the gaming state Matching with the gaming state managed on the main control unit 20 side based on the “specific effect control command” including information on the gaming state managed on the main control unit side such as designating that the game is to be transferred It is configured to be able to control transition between a plurality of types of effect modes in a form that maintains the characteristics. In the “specific effect control command”, the “variation pattern designation command”, the “game state designation command” that is transmitted when there is a change in the gaming state, and for specifying the current gaming state, There are “command”, “remaining power support count command”, predetermined commands (“big hit start interval command (big hit start command)”, “big hit end interval command (big hit end command)”) transmitted during a hit. The production control unit 24 has a function unit (production state management means) for managing the production mode related to the gaming state. The production control unit 24 (production state management means) grasps at least the gaming state (variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)) managed on the main control unit 20 side by the specific production control command described above, and performs the main control. In the form that maintains consistency with the unit 20 side, the effect mode is configured to be shift-controllable. The effect control unit 24 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to manage the internal game state and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) managed on the main control unit 20 side by the specific effect control command described above. It is possible to grasp the switching timing of. Although details will be described later, in the case of the present embodiment, according to the switching of the gaming state, it is possible to present a “launch guidance notification effect” that instructs the player whether it is a right-handed state or a left-handed state It has become.

(5-2. Basic production under each production mode)
In each production mode, the background as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative symbols in each production mode so that the player can understand what kind of gaming state the player is staying under. The display is basically controlled to be switched to different background effects. In addition to changing the background image effect according to each effect mode, each effect mode can be achieved by using a decorative pattern with a different pattern corresponding to each effect mode, or by changing sound effects, light effects, etc. Suggest. This is not from the viewpoint of winning expectation, but from the viewpoint of the player falling into an unfavorable gaming state, the effect of “fall implied effect mode” (FIGS. 34 and 35) implying the fall without it. ) Is also included.

(5-3. Production mode for giving implied information to inform the current gaming state without fail: FIGS. 34 and 35)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment, in order to inform the player whether the current gaming state is before falling or after falling, a plurality of types of effect modes related to the gaming state are provided. , It is configured to go back and forth the production suggesting the production mode.

  As the production mode, in the first embodiment, the game state is in the high probability state as the production mode of production implying whether or not the current game state managed on the main control unit 20 side is in the high probability state. Three types of effect modes A, B, and C are provided in order of decreasing possibility (see FIGS. 34 and 35). “Produce mode A” has the lowest possibility that the gaming state is in a high probability state, and therefore, even in a high base state with an open extension function, the probability change state or the short-time state is low, and no open extension function is added. In the low base state, the production mode is more likely to be the normal state. "Direction mode B" has a moderate possibility that the gaming state is in a high probability state, so if it is a high base state with an open extension function, there is hope for the possibility of a probable change state or a short time state, and an open extension function is added Even if the low base state is none, it is an effect mode in which the possibility of being in the normal state can be estimated to be moderate. “Direction mode C” is most likely the gaming state is in a high probability state, so if it is a high base state with an open extension function, you can be confident of the possibility of a probable change state or a short time state, and no extension extension function is added This is an effect mode that can be estimated that the possibility of being in the normal state is low even in the low base state.

  In addition, it is possible to make a big hit within 100 fluctuations of production support mode D, which is an effect that informs that the reserved memory (long chain in the hold) that is a big hit in the hold is confirmed, and the open support function is added. There is an effect mode E for reporting that the state is high (see FIGS. 34 and 35).

(5-4. Notice effect)
Next, the notice effect will be described. The effect control unit 24, under the above-described effect mode, the contents of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, the variation pattern information included in at least the variation pattern designation command (for example, winning lottery result, reach effect) On the basis of the presence / absence of the symbol and the variation time of the special symbol, etc.), a function unit (preliminary appearance appearance control means) that controls various notice effects related to the effect mode and the jackpot lottery result is provided. Regarding the notice appearance appearance control means, in the case of a model with a falling lottery function (falling type model) as in the first to third embodiments, at least a “fluctuation pattern designation command” and a “falling command designation” (decoration symbol designation command) (Including winning lottery result information, presence / absence of reach production, presence / absence of pseudo-ream, special stop symbol type information (hit type information), special symbol variable time information, falling lottery result information, etc.) ) Is configured so that various notice effects can be controlled, and in the case of a model that is not a fall type as in the fourth to sixth embodiments, a “variation pattern designation command” and a “decoration pattern designation command” Based on the information contained in the information, various notice effects can be controlled.

  Such a notice effect mode suggests (predicts) the reliability or expectation level (hereinafter referred to as “winning expectation degree”) of whether or not the winning type has been won, and the player's winning expectation to the winning type It works as a “drilling director” for singing. Typical notice effects include “reach effects” and “pseudo-continuous effects”. “Pseudo-continuous effect” refers to an effect that involves a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of a decorative symbol, and “pseudo variation” refers to a part of the decorative symbol or The display operation is repeated once or a plurality of times once all are temporarily stopped (a change stop operation that looks like a stop display appears), and a decorative display re-change display operation is executed from the temporary stop state. By this, it means a change display mode that expresses that the change display operation of the decorative symbols is executed a plurality of times during the single symbol change display game. This is different from a “prefetching notice effect (continuous notice effect)” described later, which is developed over a plurality of symbol variation display games.

  When performing this pseudo-variation, for example, while forming a temporary reach state (a variation display mode that suggests that there is a possibility of a reach state or that a reach pattern is formed), Execute a re-variable display operation after a temporary stop state with a combination of symbols that causes a loss, or replace a normal decorative pattern with a special decorative pattern (a special decoration that suggests the possibility of the occurrence of pseudo-ream) It is possible to execute a re-variable display operation after a temporary stop state with a combination of symbols including a symbol (pseudo continuous activation chance symbol). Therefore, in the pseudo-continuous effect, in addition to the effect mode that expresses as if the decorative symbol variation display operation is executed a plurality of times during a single symbol variation display game, By using the “chance pattern”, it is possible to include an effect mode that is executed while suggesting to the player the possibility of a pseudo fluctuation.

  In addition, in the notice effect, there is a possibility that a big hit may be won for an operation holding ball (undigested operation holding ball) that has not yet been provided for the execution of the symbol change display game (the change display operation of the special symbol) There is a so-called “look-ahead notice effect” that notifies the degree of expectation in advance. Regarding the pre-reading notice effect, first, in the main control unit 20, when an operation holding ball is generated (when a start condition is satisfied), the operation holding ball is used for executing the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of a special symbol). Before being provided, a “pre-fetching determination” is performed in which the jackpot lottery result relating to the operation holding ball is determined in advance.

  Furthermore, using the above “pre-fetching determination” result, a special symbol variation pattern (variation pattern at the start of variation) is determined in advance in the future when the activated ball is subjected to the symbol variation display game. “Pre-reading variation pattern determination” is performed (S319 in FIG. 10 (start port winning random number determination processing)). The variation pattern of the special symbol determined in advance is referred to as a “prefetch variation pattern”. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance whether the reach variation pattern that passes through the reach state or the normal variation pattern that does not pass through the reach state.

  Note that the prefetch variation pattern is determined using at least the winning lottery result (preliminary determination result of the winning lottery and the symbol lottery in the present embodiment), and therefore the prefetch variation pattern information transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side. Is not only information about the presence of reach, the type of reach production (the type of reach production according to the winning expectation), the presence or absence of pseudo-ream and the number of times, but also the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation is a big hit (including small hits) ) Information on whether it is a “hit fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning or a “losing fluctuation pattern” at the time of winning a loss is also included. When the information about the prefetch variation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs an effect control process related to the prefetch notice effect (see S714 in FIG. 18). A series of processes for determining the prefetch fluctuation pattern through the prefetch determination in this way is referred to as “prefetch determination”.

  The pre-reading notice effects include the following. Referring to FIG. 5, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments, the special symbol 1 side is activated on a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (the lower left side of the decorative symbol display area in the drawing). A holding display area 76 for displaying the number of held balls and a holding display area 77 for displaying the number of working balls on the special symbol 2 side are provided. With a holding ball: When there is a white working holding ball which is a normal color (normal holding display mode), it is a white circle, and there is a working holding ball with a color such as blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern, rainbow color, etc. The case (dedicated hold display mode) is indicated by a hatched circle) or is turned off (no action hold ball: indicated by a broken circle in the figure), and information regarding the current number of hold balls is It is to be notified.

  The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as “holding display”) is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and a maximum of four holding displays can be displayed in each holding display area 76, 77. It has become. Specifically, in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost action hold ball is the action that occurred first (that is, the oldest) on the time axis among all the action hold balls in the hold display. Displayed as a holding ball. In this embodiment, as shown in the drawing, the hold display sections a1 to d1 (icon images) each including a hold icon (icon image) provided in the same number (four) as the maximum hold storage number in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Special symbols 1 side), a2 to d2 (corresponds to special symbols 2 side). The pre-reading notice effect can be executed using these hold display portions a1 to d1 and a2 to d2. For example, normally, the display mode is switched to the operating state (lighted state) by the same number, for example, three as the number of the operation-reserved balls existing when the pre-reading determination is made. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of hold operations. However, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 is changed to a predetermined prefetch notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode). As a result, this works as a means for generating a pre-reading notice effect.

  When a pre-reading notice is displayed, among the holding icons of the holding display sections a1 to d1 and a2 to d2, the holding icon that is the target of the prefetching notice is changed from a white color of a normal holding display to a notice display, for example. A “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect such as a change to a dedicated holding color such as blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern, or rainbow color is performed (for example, the pre-reading notice winning hold in FIG. 6 (1)). . Here, the blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern, and rainbow color display of the hold icon means that the winning expectation is high in the order of the hold color, and blue, yellow, and green indicate the win expectation. Belongs to a relatively low low expectation effect (low expectation effect), and red, D pattern, and rainbow color belong to a low expectation effect (high expectation effect) with a relatively high winning expectation, especially rainbow color The display of the hold icon is a premium hold icon which is a jackpot confirmed (correct) display. Which reserved color is changed is determined by lottery based on the contents of the prefetch variation pattern. Specifically, the “big hit” is more likely to be selected than the “losing”, and if the reach type with a relatively high expectation level is selected, a reserved color with a high expectation level is selected with a high probability. It has become.

  As shown in (1) to (4) of FIG. 6, the existing operation holding balls are sequentially digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one operation holding ball has been consumed, the display position of the holding display unit corresponding to the existing operation holding ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the number of display is reduced. Although the display control is performed, the above-described hold display mode different from normal continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display (see FIGS. 6 (1) to (3)). In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect (holding change notice) of the above-described hold display change system (change system at the time of winning) is a dedicated notice effect in one or more symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations). It can be said that it is an aspect of “continuous notice effect” that can be displayed. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect of the “hold display changing system” may be generated when the operation holding ball is generated, or is a normal hold display mode at the time of winning, but changes to a dedicated hold display mode when the shift display is performed. In some cases, the timing at which the hold display is changed can be appropriately determined. Moreover, after changing to the dedicated hold display mode, it can be changed to another dedicated hold display mode. For example, after changing to blue hold at the time of winning, it can be changed to yellow hold when the shift display is performed.

  Further, on the left side of the holding display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 is provided to indicate an operating holding ball (hereinafter referred to as “game executing hold”) that is actually used in the special symbol changing display game. ing. In the case of this embodiment, the in-fluctuation display area 78 is configured such that an image of a form in which an icon of a game execution hold K currently provided for the game appears on the icon of the seat J appears. That is, when the variation display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the icon (icon image) of the oldest hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the game running hold K. The icon moves to the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and the state is maintained for a predetermined display time. When the game execution hold K is placed on the seat J, basically, the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the operation related to the current symbol variation display game is performed. A pre-reading notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode) for the holding ball is notified to the player even during the game. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of expectation of winning. When the hold display is displayed as the hold K during game execution, a hold display mode different from the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 can appear. For example, the display color of the icon changes at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game (for example, a hold with a higher win expectation than the hold display mode displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77) The display mode is changed to a display mode), and the shape is changed to another shape (for example, a character image or an item image suggesting a winning expectation degree or a pseudo-continuous generation (pseudo-continuous number)). Thereby, the winning expectation degree regarding this special symbol variation display game is more clearly notified.

  Also, in the present embodiment, unlike the above-described “holding display change type” prefetching notice effect, the “variation start change type” prefetching notice effect that is triggered by the start of the symbol variation display game can be displayed. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 6 (2), the pre-reading notice effect of the “variation start change system” is such that a pre-reading-only notice image (lightning bolt image shown) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Is an “image display change system” pre-reading notice effect that is executed in one or a plurality of symbol variation display games and is displayed once or continuously. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” is the same as the “preservation display change system” pre-reading notice effect. It can be said that this is one aspect of the “notice effect”. The “image display change type” pre-reading notice effect may be ended when the pre-reading notice of the holding display change type ends (when the pre-reading notice target hold is provided to the symbol variation display game), or may be ended as shown in FIG. ), The pre-reading notice target hold may be provided to the symbol variation display game, and may be made to appear independently even in the game in which the pre-reading notice of the hold display change system has ended.

(5-5. Production means)
The directing means related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be any stimulus transmitting means that can exert a directing effect by appealing to human perception, such as vision, hearing, touch, etc., and light generation means such as a decorative lamp 45 and an LED device, A sound generating device such as a speaker 46, an effect display device such as a liquid crystal display device 36, a vibration generating device that transmits vibration to the operator's body, a wind pressure device that applies wind pressure to the player's body, or a visual effect due to its operation A representative example is a movable body accessory that exhibits the above.

<6. List of Embodiments: FIG. 24>
Here, returning to FIG. 24, for each of the first to sixth embodiments of the present invention, “a transition state of the gaming state in which switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs” and “timing to switch from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification” Are collectively described in relation to the display mode of the guidance notification. The “game state transition mode in which switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs” refers to a case where a gaming state with an electric support state is shifted to a gaming state with an electric support state. In each of the first to sixth embodiments, the contents already described regarding the transition of the gaming state are omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

(6-1. Transition state of gaming state in which switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs)
(In the case of Embodiment 1: Section a in FIG. 24)
In the instant fall type gaming machine according to the first embodiment (section a in FIG. 24), when the big hit game is finished, the game shifts to a probable change state (high probability, with electric support). When the falling lottery is won first, the gaming state shifts from the probability changing state to the normal state (low probability, no electric support) at that time. Therefore, in the first embodiment, when shifting from the probability variation state to the normal state, switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs.

(In the case of Embodiment 2: Sections b to c in FIG. 24)
In the “probability falling type 1” gaming machine according to the second embodiment (sections b to c in FIG. 24), when the big hit game is finished, the game proceeds to a positive change state (high probability, with electric support), and the big hit during this positive change state A lottery and a probabilistic falling lottery are performed. If the winning lottery is won first in the symbol variation display operation within the guaranteed support guarantee count (for example, 100 rotations), the gaming state shifts from the probabilistic state to the short-time state (low probability, with electric support) at that time. To do. In addition, when neither the big hit lottery nor the falling lottery is won within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee number of times, the probability change state ends at the 101st rotation exceeding the electric support guarantee number of times and the latent probability state (high probability, If you don't win the falling lottery, the latent state will continue, and if you win the falling lottery before you win the jackpot lottery, you will be in the normal state (low probability) , Without power support). Therefore, in the second embodiment, switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs when shifting from the probabilistic state to the latent state or when shifting from the short-time state to the normal state.

(In the case of Embodiment 3: Sections d to e in FIG. 24)
In the “probability falling type 2” gaming machine according to the third embodiment (sections d to e in FIG. 24), when the big hit game is finished, the game proceeds to a positive change state (high probability, with electric support), and the big hit during this positive change state When the lottery and the falling lottery are performed and the symbol variation display operation within the electric support guarantee number (for example, 100 rotations) is won first, the gaming state is changed from the probabilistic state to the short time state (low Probability, with electric support), but within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee, if neither the big hit lottery nor the falling lottery is won, the probability change state will continue after the 101st rotation exceeding the electric support guarantee If the winning lottery is won before winning the big hit lottery after the 101st rotation, the state immediately shifts from the probability change state to the normal state (low probability, no electric support). Therefore, in the third embodiment, when shifting from the probability changing state to the normal state, or when shifting from the time-short state to the normal state, switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs.

(In the case of Embodiment 4: Section f in FIG. 24)
In the “ST machine type” gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment (section f in FIG. 24), when the big hit game ends, the game changes to a probability change state (high probability, with electric support), and then the probability change state a predetermined specified number of times. If a big hit is not made during that time, the state shifts from a probability change state to a normal state (low probability, no electric support). Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, when shifting from the probability changing state to the normal state, or when shifting from the short-time state to the normal state, switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs.

(In the case of Embodiment 5: Sections g to h in FIG. 24)
In the game machine of the “type including a big hit with electric support” according to the fifth embodiment (types g to h in FIG. 24), when the big hit game is finished, it shifts to a time-short state. Depending on whether or not the winner has been won, the number of short times is 20, 30, or 40. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, when any of the short-time and big hits A to C is won, switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs when shifting from the short-time state to the normal state.

(In the case of Embodiment 6: Section i in FIG. 24)
In the game machine of the “type including a big hit without electric support (ordinary big hit)” according to the sixth embodiment (section i in FIG. 24), when the big hit game ends, the gaming machine shifts to a normal state (low probability, no electric support). Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, in the case of normal big hit, switching from right-handed to left-handed guidance notification occurs when shifting from the big hit game to the normal state.

(6-2. Display mode of guidance notification: FIG. 25)
The display mode of the guidance notification in Embodiments 1-6 is shown in FIG.

  Explaining which of right-handed and left-handed is advantageous to the player, the gaming machines of Embodiments 1 to 6 (sections a to i) are all on the right side (right flow path 3c side) in the game board 3. It is assumed that there is a winning device (ordinary variable winning device 41) that can change the winning rate by the open extension function. In addition, since the big winning opening 50 belongs to the right flow down path 3c side, in any of the gaming machines of the above categories a to i, “Big hit game” and “Electric support is in progress (during the probability variation state, in the short time state)” In “,” “right-handed” is advantageous. Therefore, a guidance notification image (launch guidance notification effect) as launch guidance information indicating the launch direction of the game ball is displayed in a display mode indicating the right strike direction.

  In the first to sixth embodiments, as the “display mode indicating the right-handed direction” of the guidance notification image 373, as shown in FIG. 25A, a plurality of right-pointing arrow images 374a are arranged in a straight line to the right. The “dynamic display mode” of “right arrow right shift” that moves sequentially at a constant speed or intermittently is used, and the right-pointing arrow image 374a according to the “right arrow right shift” dynamic display mode is displayed as a decorative symbol or a preview. It is displayed at a position that does not interfere with the production. In the case of this embodiment, it is displayed in the upper right corner in the liquid crystal screen. Note that the broken line arrow 375 added in FIG. 25A has a case where the “pointing direction” of the arrow image 374a is different from the “movement direction” of the arrow image 374a (FIG. 25B). The image 374a is included in the drawing for the convenience of understanding whether the “movement direction” of the image 374a is right or left, and does not show the arrow image displayed on the liquid crystal screen. This right-pointing arrow image 374a (a group of arrow images shown in the figure) is displayed in substantially the same size, the same color, or the same color on the upper right side of the liquid crystal screen.

  Thereafter, when the state is switched as shown in the “game state transition” column of FIG. 24, for example, when the transition from the certain change state to the normal state occurs in the instant fall type (section a) gaming machine, there is no electric support. The reason that right-handed is advantageous disappears, and left-handed is more advantageous. Therefore, as a guidance notification image indicating the launch direction of the game ball, a guidance notification image indicating left strike appears at a predetermined timing shown in the right column of FIG. If the guidance notification image indicating the left strike has already disappeared, the guidance notification image indicating the left strike will appear in a “newly displayed form” after the elapse of the disappearance period. When the guidance notification image indicating the right strike has continued until just before, the right strike guidance notification image appears in a “switched form” from the left strike guidance notification image. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the right-handed guidance notification is continued until immediately before switching without particularly distinguishing the “newly displayed shape” and the “switching shape”, that is, for the left-handed guidance notification. “Switching shape” will be described as a representative example.

  In the first to sixth embodiments, as the “display mode indicating the left-handed direction” of the guidance notification image 373, a plurality of left-pointing arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line as shown in FIG. The “dynamic display mode” of “left arrow right shift” that moves sequentially at a constant speed or intermittently is used, and the left-pointing arrow image 374b according to the “left arrow right shift” dynamic display mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen. It is projected in the corner. In addition, since the “pointing direction” of the arrow image 374b is different from the “movement direction” of the arrow image 374b, the broken line arrow 375 added in FIG. 25B has the “movement direction” of the arrow image 374b. It is written in the figure for convenience of understanding whether it is right or left, and does not show an arrow image displayed on the liquid crystal screen. The left-pointing arrow image 374b is the same or substantially the same position (upper right side of the screen) as the position on the liquid crystal screen where the right-pointing arrow image 374a appeared, and the same or substantially the same size as the right-pointing arrow image 374a. It is displayed in the same color or the same color or similar color. “Similar colors” means, for example, the Munsell color system, the Chamber of Commerce Color Coordination Chart (CCIC) color system, the Japan Color Research (PCCS) color system, and the natural color system. (NCS) A color system hue ring, Ostwald hue ring, or the like, which is an adjacent color of −15 ° to + 15 ° (hue difference is 1).

  In the present embodiment, when switching from the right-pointing arrow image 374a to the left-pointing arrow image 374b, the left-pointing arrow image 374b is positioned at the same or substantially the same position (upper part of the screen) as the position on the liquid crystal screen where the right-pointing arrow image 374a appeared. (Right side), and further displayed in the same or substantially the same size, the same color, the same system color or similar color as the right-pointing arrow image 374a. That is, when the firing guidance information notification is switched from the right-handed guidance notification to the left-handed guidance notification, the left-pointing arrow image 374b is not displayed as an image that is clearly distinguished from the right-pointing arrow image 374a. An image display effect that does not immediately realize the change appears, creating a situation in which it is difficult for the player to recognize the change in the firing guidance information from “Right arrow right move” to “Left arrow right move”. The reason for making such an image display effect appear will be described based on the timing of switching to left-handed guidance notification.

(6-3. Timing of switching to left-handed guidance notification)
As described above, the guidance notification image 373 is switched from the right arrow image 374a of “right arrow right move” to the left arrow image 374b of “left arrow right move” according to the type of gaming machine and the transition state of the gaming machine. If the time (boundary) at which this switching is performed is closely observed, the timing at which the switching is performed includes (i) the case where the switching is performed at the end of the symbol change before the gaming state is changed, and (ii) the gaming state is There are two types of cases where it is performed at the beginning of the changed symbol variation. In the case of the sections a to i in FIG. 24, switching to left-handed notification is performed at any timing.

(Probability of category a → normal case)
Category a of Embodiment 1 deals with the case where the “swift falling type” wins the falling lottery during the probability change state and shifts to the normal state. When the winning lottery wins and falls to the normal state, (See Example 1, time t6 shown in FIG. 26). Therefore, in the case of category a, at the start timing of the symbol variation display game won in the falling lottery, that is, at the beginning of the symbol variation that has fallen, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left arrow image 374b of “move left arrow to right”.

(Shortened time of category b → In the case of normal case, specific example 2A)
The category b of the second embodiment deals with a case where the winning lottery is won within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee in the probability changing state in the “probable falling type 1”. In the case of this category b, the time is shortened from the time of falling (see the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, time t6), and then the electric support guarantee 100th rotation (see the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, time te). The time-short state continues until, and the next time the symbol changes (101st rotation), the time-short state changes to the normal state. Therefore, as a timing for switching the guidance notification image 373, it is conceivable to switch the guidance notification image 373 from the beginning of the next 101th symbol variation to the left arrow image 374b of “move left arrow right”.

  However, in consideration of the case where there is no reserved memory for the symbol change of the 101st rotation, when the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee is completed, the guidance notification image 373 is changed to the left arrow image 374b of “move left arrow right”. It must be switched. This is because in order to make a winning of the 101st rotation, it was necessary to start launching with zero on-hold storage, and the launching direction instruction remained “right-handed” at the time of launching. This is because when the player starts launching, the player will launch in accordance with the “right strike” guidance notification, and will be forced to launch in an unfavorable direction. Therefore, in the case of category b, the guidance is performed at the timing when the symbol variation at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee ends, that is, at the end of the symbol variation (the symbol variation at the 100th rotation) immediately before the symbol variation at the 101st rotation when the electric support is lost. The notification image 373 is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374 b of “move left arrow right”.

(Category c change → in case of latent case, specific example 2B)
Category c of the second embodiment deals with a case where the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee has arrived without winning the fall lottery within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee in the state of probability change in the “probability change fall type 1”. In the case of this category c, since the electric support is no longer in the latent state from the time when the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee is completed (see specific example 2B, time te shown in FIG. 30), the electric support is lost. Right-handed is a disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in the case of category c, in the same way as in category b, taking into account the case where there is no reserved memory for performing the symbol variation of the 101st rotation, At the end of (or immediately after) the 100th rotation of the symbol variation at the 100th rotation (or immediately after the symbol variation), which is the end trigger with the electric support, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b.

(Shortened time of category d → in the case of normal case, specific example 3A: same as specific example 2A)
Category d of Embodiment 3 deals with a case (specific example 3A) in which the winning lottery is won within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee in the probability changing state in the “probability falling type 2”, and the time is short after the falling. Yes. The switching timing in the case of the category d is the same as that in the specific example 2A. That is, in the case of the section d, as in the case of the section b, the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee arrives after falling into the short-time state (see the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, time te), and this 100 rotation Since the time reduction state is changed from the short-time state to the normal state after the eye ends, the guidance notification image 373 is displayed at the timing when the symbol variation at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee is completed, that is, at the end of the symbol variation at the 100th rotation that is the end trigger of the electric support. The screen is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b of “Left arrow right movement”.

(Probability of category e → case 3B in case of normal case)
In category e of Embodiment 3, in the “probability change fall type 2”, even if the electric support guarantee 100 rotations in the probability change state is exceeded, the fall lottery is not won, and after that, the probability change state continues and 130 rotations. The case (specific example 3B) that wins the falling lottery with the eyes (see time t6 in FIG. 36) is handled. In the case of this category e, from the 130th rotation of the symbol variation, it becomes a normal state, the electric support is lost, and the right strike is in a disadvantageous state for the player. Therefore, in the case of section e, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b at the beginning of the 130th rotation of the symbol variation.

(Probability of category f → normal case)
The division f of the fourth embodiment deals with a case where the 100th rotation of the ST specified number of times has arrived in the “ST machine type”. In the case of this category f, the probability change state falls to the normal state upon completion of the ST specified number of 100th rotations. Therefore, at the timing when the symbol variation at the 100th rotation is completed, that is, at the end of the symbol variation at the 100th rotation that is the end of the electric support, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left arrow image 374b of “left arrow right movement”. It is done.

(In the case of category g time reduction → time reduction)
In the “type including time-saving jackpot (type including multiple types of time-saving jackpot (each time jackpot granting a different number of power support guarantees)”) (category g to h) of Embodiment 5 If the number of time reductions is given to one of the three types of 20 times, 30 times, and 40 times, but the time reduction number is not notified to the player, that is, the power support guarantee number is given from the player. It deals with cases that are concealed (electric support support times concealment production). Of these, the category g is, for example, 30 times or 40 times of electric power support guarantees, and has reached the boundary value of 20 time and length, but still handles the case where the time reduction state continues. For example, when “30 times shorter” or “40 times shorter” is given, the “time 20th rotation” or “time 30th rotation”, which is the boundary value of the time-short length that comes before it, is there. In such a case, a boundary value ("20 times short" or "20 times short" or "short hours" that comes before the given number of times (here, 30 times or 40 times) is used. Every time “30 times”), at the timing when the short-time symbol variation related to the boundary value ends, the time-shortening continues without ending, so the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b of “left arrow right movement”. The right arrow image 374a is continuously displayed as it is.

(Shortened time for category h → normal case)
Unlike the case of the above-mentioned section g, the category h of the fifth embodiment is the “type including time and big jackpots”, and after the big hit game is finished, the number of times of the hourly speeds is 20 times, 30 times, and 40 times. Any number of time reductions is given, and the case where the time reduction state is reached after reaching the longest boundary value of the time reduction lengths of 20 times, 30 times, and 40 times is handled. In this case, when the given short time count (20 times, 30 times, 40 times) has arrived, that is, when the longest boundary value is reached, at the timing when the short time symbol fluctuation related to the longest boundary value ends, At the end of symbol variation of the time reduction “20th rotation”, “time reduction 30th rotation”, and “time reduction 40th rotation”, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b.

  As described above, the guidance notification image 373 directly notifies whether or not the electric support is completed. For this reason, for example, in the case of a model such as “immediate fall type” in section a of Embodiment 1, switching of the firing guidance information (switching from right-handed notification to left-handed notification at the start of the game won in the falling lottery) Therefore, if the player immediately senses the change of the firing guidance information, it will be understood that the player has fallen without waiting for the end of the current symbol variation display game. In such a case, the player stops launching without waiting for the end of the current symbol variation display game to prevent useless balls, and as a result, there is a concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine may be reduced. In addition, as a notice effect, when a special notice effect (for example, “Treasure Box Effect” described later) that encourages the winning or non-winning of the falling lottery appears, the winning lottery was won without looking at the notice effect. This is perceived by the player, and the cornering effect is ruined. Similarly, in the case of other embodiments, if it is possible to delay the detection of the timing of the electric support, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased, and the notice effect related to the symbol variation display game can be watched carefully. You will be able to.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when switching from the right-pointing arrow image 374a to the left-pointing arrow image 374b, the left-pointing arrow image 374b is positioned at the same or substantially the same position (screen) as the right-pointing arrow image 374a appeared. In addition, it is displayed in the same or substantially the same size, the same color, the same system color or similar color as the right-pointing arrow image 374a, and "Right arrow right shift" to "Left arrow right shift" This creates a situation where it is difficult to recognize the change in the firing guidance information, and it is difficult to immediately recognize that the switch has been made to the left-handed guidance notification. As a result, it is predicted that the player recognizes that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched from right-handed notification to left-handed notification, and the recognition of the end of the electric support is often shifted backward.

(Category i jackpot game → normal case)
In addition, the division i of the sixth embodiment deals with “a type including a big hit without electric support”. That is, after winning the normal big hit without electric support, and after the big hit game is finished, the state immediately shifts to the normal state without electric support. Therefore, right hitting is no longer in an advantageous state immediately after the big hit game ends, so the guidance notification image 373 is just before the big hit game ends (during the ending effect after the final round game ends) or when the big hit game ends (immediately after the end). Is switched to the left-pointing arrow image 374b of “Move left arrow to right”. The end of the big hit game is notified to the player from the ending effect, so it is not particularly necessary to make it difficult to recognize the change of the firing guidance information, especially when not transitioning to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In order to clearly notify the end of the big hit game, it can be said that it is preferable to display the left-handed guidance notification in an effect mode that the player can immediately recognize. Therefore, unlike the case of the first to fifth embodiments described above, it is preferable to display the left-pointing arrow image 374b as an image that is clearly distinguished from the right-pointing arrow image 374a in the case of the normal big hit. For example, when switching from the right-pointing arrow image 374a to the left-pointing arrow image 374b, the left-pointing arrow image 374b is displayed at a position different from the position on the liquid crystal screen where the right-pointing arrow image 374a appeared. At least one of display modes of displaying in a different size and displaying in a special color (for example, a color of a relationship (a complementary color) or a color of a different system) positioned in the opposite direction in the hue circle) Is preferably adopted.

<7. Switching to left-handed guidance notification and treasure box production: Fig. 25>
In the first embodiment, when the gaming state on the main control unit 20 side is switched from the state with electric support (probability change state) to the state without electric support (normal state) (when the falling lottery is won), a fall command is transmitted. (Step S425 in FIG. 13). When the effect control unit 24 receives this fall command, the gaming state is changed to a no-electric support state in priority to other reach effects such as reach effects or in parallel with or overlapping these notice effects. A “skeptical effect” is generated as a notice effect that doubts that there is a possibility of the transition. Specifically, the “treasure box effect” shown in FIG. 25B is generated as the “skeptical effect”. That is, the liquid crystal screen is changed from the normal screen shown in FIG. 25A to the treasure box effect screen shown in FIG. In this treasure chest effect, a treasure chest image 371 and a push button image 372 appear on the liquid crystal screen, and the corresponding push button (frame effect button 13) is operated within a predetermined operation effective period to operate a predetermined button operation condition. (For example, pressing the push button for a predetermined period of time or hitting it a predetermined number of times), as a production result, the treasure chest (treasure chest image 371) in the screen opens and a pile of jewels appears, “Lid open effect (success effect)” that informs the continuation of the support state, or the treasure chest cover is not opened even if the push button is operated. This is a “player participation type” production mode in which “production (failure production)” appears. Even when the button operation is not performed during the predetermined operation valid period, either the continuation or end of the electric support state is notified as the effect result. The above-mentioned “treasure box effect” works as a notice effect that makes it possible to suspect that the gaming state has transitioned to a state without electric support, so the effect control unit 24 side is not limited to the case where a fall command is received. The treasure chest effect (skeptical effect) can be displayed even when a specific variation pattern designation command (for example, a command for designating a specific reach variation pattern) related to the non-winning is received.

<Regarding attention distraction production>
The true purpose of generating the above-mentioned “treasure box effect” is to switch the guidance information when the gaming state shifts to the no-power support state and the firing guidance information notification switches from right-handed notification to left-handed notification. This is because the player's attention is turned away from the event of notifying the player (display of the guidance notification image 373) so as not to realize that the firing guidance information notification has been switched to the left-handed guidance notification. In the first embodiment, when switching from the right-pointing arrow image 374a to the left-pointing arrow image 374b, an image effect resembling the left-pointing arrow image 374b and the right-pointing arrow image 374a is displayed. Although it is difficult to realize that it has been switched to the guidance notification, the guidance of the launch is made by diverting the player's attention from the guidance notification image 373 by displaying the “treasure box production (skeptical production)” repeatedly. It is even more difficult to realize that the information notification has been switched to left-handed guidance notification. Therefore, the “treasure box effect” is a “skeptical effect” that, in terms of content, smells or doubts that the gaming state has shifted to a state without electric support, but from the viewpoint of use or action, the notification of the firing guidance information It also serves as an effect aimed at diverting the player's attention (hereinafter referred to as “attention diversion effect”).

  The “treasure box effect” in the present embodiment is aimed at appearing as this “distraction effect”. In this case, other effects can be generated instead of the treasure box effects. Even if it is decided to generate other effects instead of this treasure box effect, the purpose is to distract the player, so a player participation type effect such as operating the push button by the player Is preferred. However, it is not necessarily a player participation type effect. For example, by using the fact that people tend to pay attention to moving objects, and including a movable body effect by a movable object as part of a treasure chest effect, it is possible to obtain a distraction effect effect. For example, as a precursor effect before the treasure box is opened, a movable body effect (for example, the flower-shaped accessory 90 is vibrated up and down) that causes the flower-shaped accessory 90 to operate in a predetermined operation pattern appears. In response to the expectation of whether or not will be opened, the player will pay attention to the flower-shaped accessory 90, and the “treasure box opening effect” will appear. In particular, if the suggestion of the continuation expectation of the state with the electric support is suggested by the difference in the operation mode of the flower-shaped accessory 90, the player will pay attention to the operation of the flower-shaped accessory 90, and the distraction effect It is suitable for obtaining a functional effect.

  Referring to FIG. 25, the timing at which this player-participation-type effect starts is the game period in which the symbol variation display game in which the guidance notification image 373 is switched to left-handed notification is performed (the symbol variation stops after the symbol variation starts). Is the time (starting point) at which the game is started. That is, when the symbol variation display game is started, as shown in FIG. 25 (b), from the beginning of the game period, on the other hand, the guidance notification image 373 of the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. On the other hand, an image of “treasure box effect” appears on the liquid crystal screen.

  This “treasure box effect” is a player participation type effect in which the player repeatedly hits a push button corresponding to the push button image 372 appearing on the liquid crystal screen. In this case, the focus is on repeatedly pressing the push button and whether or not the treasure chest in the screen is opened. In addition to this, in the guidance notification image 373, the dynamic display mode of “Right arrow right shift” in FIG. 25A is changed to the “Left arrow right shift” dynamic display mode of FIG. 25B. Although the arrow image is switched from the right arrow image 374a to the left arrow image 374b due to the switching, both the arrow images 374a and 374b move in the right direction, the movement directions are the same, and the right-pointing arrow image Since the 374a and the left-pointing arrow image 374b are the same or similar in that they are similar arrow images, the player does not feel much that the guidance direction has been switched.

  That is, this treasure box effect includes two elements. One is that the right arrow image 374a and the left arrow image 374b are similar to each other (the width of change is small) "static attention distraction element (strictly, not distracting attention but making it difficult to pay attention) The other is a “dynamic attention distraction element” in which a larger change display (a treasure box effect or a continuous hit effect) is performed at the timing when the arrow image changes. The former is a passive countermeasure that prevents the player from being aware of changes as much as possible, and the latter is an aggressive countermeasure that actively distracts the player's attention from the object (the display object that the player wants to distract from). It is. Naturally, since each of these has a certain effect, not only both but also one of the deflecting elements can be adopted.

  If FIG. 25 is referred, the guidance alerting | reporting image 373 will be a "static attention distraction means", and the treasure box image 371 and the push button image 372 will correspond to a "dynamic attention distraction means." However, the embodiment is not limited to this, and the on-hold displays a1 to a4 and b1 to b4 are used as “static distraction means”, and almost no flashy effect display is performed when the color or display form changes. You may make it not. Although not shown, for example, a character image that occupies more than half of the display area is displayed so as to cross the screen as “dynamic distraction means” and is displayed so as to overlap the front side of the hold display. The hold display may be changed while it overlaps with the hold display and the hold display disappears for a moment. This is not limited to image display, and a movable accessory provided in a gaming machine may be used as “dynamic attention distraction means”.

  Here, returning to the embodiment of FIG. 25, when the above two elements (static attention distraction effect and dynamic attention distraction effect) overlap, that is, the player's consciousness is directed to the push button repeated hitting. And the situation where it is difficult to recognize the change in the firing guidance information from “right arrow right movement” to “left arrow right movement”, the guidance notification image 373 is left from the right-handed notification to the player. It is predicted that the time point at which it is recognized that the notification has been switched to the hit notification will be delayed, and there will often be a shift backward in the one game period. This means that there are many cases where the player keeps pushing the push button repeatedly until the game is settled about the “treasure box effect”, that is, until it becomes clear whether or not the treasure box is opened. Therefore, as a result, the fun of the treasure chest effect is fully enjoyed by the player, so that the provision of the treasure chest effect is meaningful, and the gaming property of the gaming machine is enriched. Therefore, it is preferable to use these two in combination, and if only one of them is used, it is preferable to preferentially adopt a dynamic distraction effect that is an aggressive countermeasure.

  Note that, as described above, since the gaming machine can make a prefetch determination, if it is determined by the prefetch determination that there is a hold that has won the falling lottery within the hold, the above skepticism is started before the change of the hold is started. It is also possible to start a direct production. In this case, the treasure box effect is executed over a plurality of variations, and at first glance, even if it is an effect within one variation, it actually means that a plurality of suspensions are consumed. The advantage of this is that it does not return from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification at the same time as the start of the skeptical production, but during the skeptical production (when the change of the hold that won the falling lottery was started or stopped) ) To return to the left-handed, it is difficult to notice that the player who is paying attention to the skeptical production has changed from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification.

  In the case of the first and third embodiments, the timing of the end of the electric support is not fixed, and in the case of the fifth embodiment, the number of times that the electric support is guaranteed is hidden from the player for the production. The treasure chest effect according to the form is mainly used as an effect for notifying whether or not the electric support state is continued. On the other hand, in the case of Embodiments 2 and 4, the end timing of the power support state is fixed, so the treasure box effects according to these embodiments are mainly used as effects that give a sense of expectation as to whether or not a big win has been won. (This will be described later).

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 7 to 14>
Next, with reference to FIG. 7 to FIG. 14, game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The main control unit 20 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 7) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 8).

<8. Main process on the main control side: FIG. 7>
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control unit 20 side. The main process is started when the power is turned on without operating the initialization switch (RAM clear switch: not shown) as in the case of recovery from a power failure, and the initialization switch is turned on. There is a case where the power source is turned on by being operated. In any case, when the power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a voltage is supplied to each control board by the power supply board 31, and the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) starts the main control side main process shown in FIG. .

  In the main control side main process, the CPU 201 first executes a necessary initial setting process before the start of the gaming operation (step S011).

  Next, the state (ON, OFF) of the RAM clear signal which is an output signal of the RAM clear switch input through an input port (not shown) is determined (step 012). Here, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize the entire area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch operated by the store clerk of the pachinko parlor. doing. Here, assuming that the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, the determination result in step S012 is “YES”, and the entire area of the RAM is cleared to zero (step S016).

  Next, a “RAM clear display command” for notifying that the RAM area has been cleared to zero is transmitted as an initialization command to each control board (step S017). Then, for example, 30 seconds is stored in the RAM clear notification timer as a time for notifying that the RAM has been cleared (step S018). When the RAM clear is executed, the gaming state is initialized, the internal gaming state is set to the normal gaming state, and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode))) is set to the normal state. Also, when the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear display command, an initialization notification effect for notifying that the RAM has been cleared is executed until the RAM clear notification timer (30 seconds) elapses. As the state effect mode, the effect mode is set to the “normal effect mode” corresponding to the normal state.

  Next, the CTC that outputs an interrupt signal for starting the timer interrupt operation is initialized (step S019), and the CPU is set in an interrupt enabled state.

  Thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are repeated until an interrupt occurs, and various random number update processes are executed during that time (steps S020 to S022). In this various random number update processing (step S021), various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. The various random numbers are used, for example, for changing the initial value (start value) of a random number relating to the big hit lottery (a special symbol determination random number used for the symbol lottery) circulating through a predetermined numerical range by increment processing. Random numbers (special symbol determination initial value random number) and random numbers used for changing the initial value of auxiliary lottery (random numbers for auxiliary symbol determination for use per auxiliary lottery, normal symbol determination random numbers) The initial value random number for hit determination, the initial value random number for normal symbol determination), the random number for variation pattern used for selection of the variation pattern, and the like are included.

  Random number counters for special symbol determination, random number counter for special symbol determination, random counter for special symbol determination, and auxiliary hit determination A random number counter initial value generation counter, auxiliary hit determination random number counter, variation pattern random number counter, and the like are provided. In the various random number update processing in step S021, the above-described special symbol determination random number counter, the two initial value generation counters for generating the initial value of the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, the fluctuation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated. Generate various soft random numbers. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as the variation pattern random number counter is 0 to 238, a value is obtained from the count value storage area for generating the variation pattern random number value in the RAM 203, and 1 is added to the obtained value. And then stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 239, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same manner. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes except during a timer interrupt process that is executed intermittently.

  Returning to the determination process in step S012, the description will be continued. At the time of recovery from the power failure state, the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal) is in the OFF state (step S012: YES). In such a case, the backup flag value is determined following the determination process in step S012 (step S013). Note that the backup flag is set to the ON state (backup flag = 5AH ('** H' means any hexadecimal number) when the power is cut off), and the backup flag is set to the OFF state (backup) in the first timer interrupt processing after power is restored. Flag = 00H).

  Therefore, when the power is turned on or when recovering from a power failure, the backup flag should normally be in the ON state. However, the backup flag is reset (OFF) if the predetermined processing is not completed before the power is cut off for some reason. When the backup flag is in the OFF state (step S013: NO), the process proceeds to step S016 to return the operation of the gaming machine to the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the backup flag is in an ON state (step S013: YES), a checksum calculation for calculating a checksum value is executed. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. When the checksum value is calculated, the calculation result is compared with the stored value at the SUM address in the RAM 203 (step S014). The SUM address stores a checksum value obtained by the same checksum calculation when the power is turned off. The stored calculation result is maintained by a backup power source together with other data of the RAM 203. Therefore, originally, both should match according to the determination in step S014.

  However, if the checksum operation could not be executed when the power was turned off, or even if it can be executed, the data in the work area may be damaged before the checksum operation of the main process is executed. In such a case, the determination result in step S014 is inconsistent. If data corruption is detected due to a discrepancy between the determination results (step S014: NO), the process proceeds to step S016, RAM clear processing is executed, and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. On the other hand, when the checksum value obtained by the checksum calculation matches the stored value at the SUM address (step S014: YES), the stack pointer before power shutdown is restored based on the backup data, and the processing at power shutdown is performed. A game restoration process necessary for starting the game from the state is performed (step S015).

  When the game restoration process at step S015 is completed, the process proceeds to the process at step S019, the CTC is initialized and the CPU is set in the interrupt enabled state, and thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are set until an interrupt occurs. In the meantime, various random number update processes described above are executed (steps S020 to S022).

<9. Main control timer interrupt processing: Fig. 8>
Next, a timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interruption process. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 4 ms) from the CTC, and interrupted and executed during execution of the main control side main process. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the address value (including data described in the address) when the CPU 201 reads / writes the main memory such as RAM and ROM, and result information obtained by arithmetic processing on the program Is called “acquisition”, and the CPU 201 accesses the RAM work area and stores predetermined data is called “storage”. There is.

  In FIG. 8, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first saves the contents of the register in the stack area, and then performs a power supply abnormality check process for monitoring the power supply state from the power supply control board 31 (step S051). In this power abnormality check process, it is mainly monitored whether the power is normally supplied. Here, for example, when an abnormality such as a power interruption occurs, a backup process is performed in which predetermined game information at the time of power interruption is stored in the RAM so that the game can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored.

  Next, a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control is performed (step S052). Timer values of various timers (for example, special symbol accessory operation timer described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are managed (updated) here.

  Next, input management processing is performed (step S053). In this input management process, information detected by various sensors provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the winning counter. Here, the detection information by the various sensors is output from winning detection switches such as the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the big winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, and the like. ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of the switch signal. Thereby, it is monitored for each interruption whether or not a game ball is detected (winning occurs) at each winning opening. The “winning counter” is a counter that is provided corresponding to each winning slot and counts the number of winning game balls (the number of winning balls). In the present embodiment, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, an upper start opening winning counter for the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening winning counter for the lower starting opening 35, a normal symbol starting opening winning counter for the normal pattern starting opening 37, a large A prize winning counter for the prize winning opening 50, a prize winning counter for the general winning opening 43 for the general winning opening 43, and the like are provided.

  Next, random number management processing within a timer interrupt for periodically updating the random numbers related to each variation display game is performed (step S054). In this periodic random number update process, a special symbol determination random number or auxiliary per-subject determination random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt), and a process for changing the start value of the random number counter is performed each time the random number counter makes a round. For example, the value of the special symbol judgment random number counter is updated (added by +1) within a predetermined range, and the special symbol judgment random number counter initial value generation counter value is read each time the special symbol judgment random number counter makes one round. The value of the generation counter is stored in the special symbol determination random number counter. As a result, the start value of the special symbol determination random number counter is changed according to the value of the generation counter, so that the count value of the special symbol determination random number counter is random while the update cycle is constant.

  Next, an error management process for monitoring presence / absence of abnormality in the game operation state is performed (step S055). This error management process also functions as an abnormality determination means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, monitors an abnormality in the gaming operation state, and if an operation abnormality (error) occurs, the error that has occurred Error handling corresponding to.

  Next, prize ball management processing is performed (step S056). In this prize ball management process, the data stored in the above input management process is grasped and the prize counter is checked. Control unit) 29. Upon receiving this payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for the designated number of prize balls. As a result, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning mouth (a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning mouth × the number of winning balls corresponding to the value of the winning counter) is paid out. Yes.

  Next, normal symbol management processing is performed (step S057). In this normal symbol management process, a lottery per auxiliary in the normal symbol variation display game is performed, and based on the lottery result, the variation pattern of the normal symbol and the stop display mode of the normal symbol (the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed finally (normal stop) Data) for normal symbols that repeat blinking every predetermined time (LED blinking display data during normal symbol fluctuation) is created. If the normal symbol is not fluctuating, stop display data ( LED blinking display data during normal symbol stop display). The normal symbol management process functions as an auxiliary game lottery unit and a normal symbol display unit (normal symbol display control unit) for controlling the normal symbol variation display operation.

  Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is performed (step S058). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the generation of an excitation signal for solenoid control for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a necessary for the generation of the ordinary electric game based on the lottery result of the auxiliary per lot in the normal symbol management process (step S057). And the data (solenoid control data) is set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a in a solenoid management process described later, whereby the operation of the movable blade piece 47 is controlled.

  Next, special symbol management processing is performed (step S059). This special symbol management process functions as a jackpot determination means and a fall determination means, and mainly performs a jackpot lottery in a special symbol variation display game, and based on the lottery result, the variation pattern of the special symbol (pre-reading variation pattern, variation start) Time fluctuation pattern) and special stop symbols. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, special electric accessory management processing is performed (step S060). In this special electric utility management process, when the big hit lottery result is “big hit” or “small win”, the setting process necessary for executing and controlling the hit game corresponding to the big hit is performed. Details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, right notification information management processing is performed (step S061). In this right-handed notification information management process, if the high base gaming state of “electric support is present” occurs, or if it is a winning game, the right-handed instruction information ( In order to display a “right-handed notification effect (launching guidance notification effect)” for reporting information for instructing to aim at the right flow path 3c (instruction information for prompting winning to the big winning opening 50 or the normal symbol starting opening 37). Perform the process. In the case of the right-handed state, a “right-handed instruction command” instructing the start of the firing guidance notification effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives the command and the effect control unit 24 The notification effect can be controlled. Thereby, an appropriate launch position is instructed to the player.

  Also, in the right-handed notification information management process, when the low base gaming state of “no power support” occurs, or when the winning game is not being played, the right-handed notification effect is displayed assuming that the player is in the left-handed state. A process for stopping the execution of the right-hand-notifying effect during the process of not appearing and the appearance is performed. In the case of the left-handed state, a “left-handed instruction command” instructing to stop the firing guidance notification effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and upon receiving this command, the effect control unit 24 receives the firing guidance notification. The structure is such that the production can be controlled.

  On the side of the production control unit 24, when a right-handed instruction command or a left-handed instruction command is received based on the current presentation mode and / or the current gaming state managed by the production control unit 24, the right-handed state is changed to the left-handed state. Alternatively, the appearance control of the guidance notification image 373 (the right-pointing arrow image 374a or the left-pointing arrow image 374b) is performed according to whether or not it is the timing to switch from the left-handed state to the right-handed state. In the case of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25A, as a right-handed notification effect, the guidance notification image 373 is located at a position (upper right corner) where it does not interfere with the decorative symbol display area in the liquid crystal screen. It is displayed in the dynamic display mode of “move right arrow”. In addition, when switching from the right-handed state to the left-handed state, the effect control unit 24 switches the guidance notification image 373 to display according to the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement” in FIG. Yes. Note that switching between the right-pointing arrow image 374a and the left-pointing arrow image 374b is not performed using the right-handed instruction command or the left-handed instruction command, but is transmitted during hitting, for example, a variation pattern designation command or a game state designation command. The timing of game state change is ascertained with predetermined commands (such as big hit (small hit) start command, big hit (small hit) end command, etc.), remaining power support count command, short time end command, fall command, etc. It is good also as a structure which can show the launch guidance alerting | reporting effect according to a game state.

  Next, LED management processing is performed (step S062). In this LED management process, display data is output to the normal symbol display device 39a and the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Thereby, the change display and stop display of a normal symbol and a special symbol are performed. It should be noted that the normal symbol display data created in the normal symbol management process in step S057 and the special symbol display data update process (step S309 in FIG. 9 described later) during the special symbol management process in step S059 Display data is output by this LED management process.

  Next, external terminal management processing is performed (step S063). In this external terminal management process, the operation state information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external concentration terminal board 21. The operation status information includes the fact that a big hit game has occurred (condition device has been activated), a small hit game has occurred, a symbol variation display game has been executed, and winning information (for example, a starting point or a big prize) Various information such as information on winning a prize and the number of winning balls) and error occurrence information are included.

  Next, solenoid management processing is performed (step S064). In this solenoid management process, an excitation signal output process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data created in the ordinary electric accessory management process in step S058, or a special electric accessory management process in step S060. Excitation signal output processing for the special winning opening solenoids 42c and 52c based on the solenoid control data is performed. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47, the open door 42b, and the open door 52b are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the lower start opening 35 and the big prize opening 50 are opened and closed.

  After the processing of steps S051 to S064 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (register restoration processing), and the interrupt enabled state is set (step S065). Thus, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interruption, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interruption occurs.

<10. Special symbol management processing: Fig. 9>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S059) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process in step S059.

  In FIG. 9, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 start port check process on the special symbol 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then a special symbol on the special symbol 2 side (lower start port 35 side). 2. A starting port check process is performed (step S302). Details of this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the start opening check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hitting flag is determined (step S303). This “small hitting flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a small hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not being played.

  When the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), the state of the condition device operation flag is then determined (step S304). The “conditional device operation flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the big hit game is not being played.

  If the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, neither the small hit game nor the big hit game (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH), special In accordance with the symbol operation status (00H to 03H), processing related to the special symbol variation display operation is performed (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, if the small hit game is being played (step S303: = 5 AH) or if the big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5 AH), the processing related to the variable symbol display operation of steps S306 to S308 is not performed. It progresses to the special symbol display data update process of step S309. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game, the special symbol variation display operation is not performed (the special symbol display state of the special symbol display device is displayed after the small hit or after the big hit) As it is). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branching process of step S305, depending on which status value the special symbol operation status is “waiting (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)” or “confirming (03H)”. The processing corresponding to each is executed.

  Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H, 01H)”, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) is performed. When the symbol variation processing (step S307) is “confirming (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) is executed. Here, “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned “under confirmation” indicates that the special symbol has been changed and is stopped (confirmed) and is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, a variation display operation that sets a variation start and a variation stop of a special symbol is realized. The details of the special symbol variation start process (step S306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When any of the processes in steps S306 to S308 is completed, a special symbol display data update process in step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. If the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blink display during special symbol stop display) is generated. The special symbol display data created here is output in the LED management process (step S62) of FIG. Thus, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S060 of FIG.

(10-1. Starting port check processing: FIG. 10)
First, the start port check process (steps S301 and S302 in FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of the special figure 1 starting port check process in step S301 and the special figure 2 starting port check process in step S302. This starting opening check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition. In the special figure 1 starting opening check process in step S301, the special symbol variation display game 1 is executed. As a pre-start process, the process of adding the number of suspended balls on the special figure side caused by the occurrence of winning at the upper start port 34, the process of storing various random numbers, the command at the time of winning, and the process of creating / sending the hold addition command are performed. In the special figure 2 starting opening check process of step S302, the start of the special symbol variation display game 2 is executed (starting process on the special figure 2 side) due to the occurrence of winning at the lower starting opening 35. A process of adding the number of suspended balls on the special figure 2 side, a process of storing various random numbers, a process of creating a pending addition command, and the like are performed. FIG. 10 will be described by focusing on the special figure 1 start opening check process, and the special figure 2 start opening check process is substantially the same as the special figure 1 start opening check process, and therefore redundant description is avoided. Therefore, detailed description is omitted.

  In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311).

  When the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of the operation holding balls (hereinafter referred to as “special drawing 1 operation holding balls”) according to the special symbol 1 is less than the maximum holding memory number (here, the upper limit of four). If no winning is detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited without doing anything.

  If the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected, but the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S312: YES), the process proceeds to step S325 described later, and the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is not four or more. If this is the case, that is, if it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the special figure 1 operation holding ball number (step S313), and the process proceeds to step S314.

  When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used for the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the fluctuation pattern random number, and the fall determination random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number value is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. Store. The reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operating reserve ball (holding data). Until the first variation display operation is performed (until the execution of the special symbol variation display game 1), it is held and stored in the order in which the start conditions are established (the winning order). The reserved memory area includes a reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (a special symbol 1 reserved memory area corresponding to the special symbol 1 (first reserved memory area)) and a special symbol 2 And a special figure 2 reserved storage area (second reserved storage area) corresponding to. These reserved storage areas are provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (n is the maximum number of activated balls to be held: in this embodiment, n = 4), and each of the held data for the maximum number of balls to be activated is held. Can be stored.

  Of the various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number and the variation pattern random number are extracted from a random number counter that generates a random number in software corresponding to each random number. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated randomly in the main process executed between the interrupt process that occurs intermittently and the interrupt process in the count value storage area corresponding to each random number counter, the value is acquired as it is. Is done. On the other hand, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit (a jackpot determination random number counter: not shown) that generates a random number in hardware. The random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing when a game ball detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 34a, and the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. The CPU 201 stores this count value as a jackpot determination random number value in a storage area for the jackpot determination random value in the RAM 203 provided separately from the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (a random latch buffer for determining the operation of the special electric accessory). At a necessary timing, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the random number latch buffer for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is read and used.

  Next, pre-read prohibition data (EVENT: “FFH”) for prohibiting pre-reading determination is acquired as win command data (data corresponding to the low-order byte side (EVENT) of the win command) for creating a win command ( Step S315), it is determined whether or not “Special Figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is satisfied (Step S316). The “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

  When the special chart 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the processing related to the prefetch determination (steps S317 to S319) is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S320A. In this case, in the process of step S315, the winning command having the prefetch prohibition data (EVENT: “FFH”) designates the prefetch prohibition, and the prefetch determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is prohibited. As a result, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (refer to the processing route of step S316: YES). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited when the game state is accompanied by the “electric support state”. This is because during the power support state, the lower start opening 35 frequently occurs and the upper start opening 34 hardly occurs, so there is little need to generate a pre-reading notice on the special symbol 1 side. This is to reduce the control burden.

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), the process proceeds to the process of step S317 after the ground state setting process (FIG. 11) of step S316A (step S317). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the 'look ahead determination' process, and here, the operation holding ball of this time (here, in the special symbol fluctuation display game 1 (special figure 1) side in this process) 'Prefetching determination (prefetching winning determination)' for determining the “winning lottery” in advance is performed.

(Base state setting process: FIG. 11)
FIG. 11 shows details of the ground state setting process (step S316A in FIG. 10). In this ground state setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the current look-ahead ground state flag is in a high probability state (shown as high probability in the drawing) (step S351). If it is in the high probability state (step S351: YES), pre-reading determination of the random value (type information) of the fall determination random number stored as the hold data in the hold storage area or the fall determination random number held in the register (Step S352), it is determined whether or not the “falling lottery” for shifting the high probability state to the low probability state is won (Step S353). If it is determined to pre-read if this falling lottery is won (step S353: YES), the pre-read base state flag is set to a low probability state (shown as low probability in the figure) (step S354). Then, the ground state setting process is exited. If it is determined that the pre-decision lottery is not won (step S353: NO), the ground state setting process is exited while the prefetch ground state flag is maintained in the high probability state. Then, the process proceeds to step S317 in FIG.

  If the prefetch ground state flag is in the low probability state in the determination in step S351 (step S351: NO), the ground state setting process is exited without performing the prefetch determination of the fall determination random number (step S352). And it returns to step S316A of FIG. 10, and progresses to step S317.

  Therefore, through this ground state setting process, the determination of each random number performed in subsequent steps S317 to S319 (prefetch determination means) is correctly performed based on the game state (prefetch base state) at the time of winning. That is, the prefetch determination is performed based on the lottery data with a low probability when the prefetch ground state at the time of winning is in the low probability state, and based on the lottery data with a high probability when in the high probability state.

  Returning to FIG. 10, when the random number determination process of step S317 is entered, first, the big hit determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is acquired, and then a hit random number determination table described later is obtained. (Not shown). Then, based on the obtained big hit determination random number value and the hit random number determination table, the winning lottery for the current operation holding ball (another determination of big hit, small hit, lose), that is, the current operation holding ball fluctuates The lottery result (the winning lottery result at the start of the change) of “special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process (see S409 in FIG. 12 to be described later)” executed when the display operation is performed is determined in advance. Get the result.

(T-1. Per random number determination table)
The hit random number determination table includes a “random figure determination table for special figure 1 (not shown)” related to the special symbol fluctuation display game 1 and a “random figure determination table for special figure 2” related to the special symbol fluctuation display game 2. (Not shown) ”, during the special figure 1 start opening check process of FIG. 10“ random number determination table for special figure 1 ”, during the special figure 2 start opening check process of FIG. Reference is made to the “per random number determination table for FIG. 2”. In the case of the present embodiment, in the random number determination process in step S317, a common “hit random number determination table” is referred to in the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation display game 2.

  In the hit random number determination table of the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number (the size of the big hit determination random number: 65536) for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability state (high probability), low probability state (low probability)). And a determination area (determination value) for determining the type of winning (whether or not) (big hit, small hit or lost) is determined in association with each other. Whether it is a big hit, a small hit or a loss is determined depending on whether it belongs to a value. Therefore, even if the acquired big hit determination random number value belongs to the same determination value (when the big hit determination random number value is the same value), the current big hit lottery probability state is a high probability state or a low probability. Depending on whether it is in a state, the “winning type” may be different, such as “big hit” on the one hand and “lack” on the other side. Note that the winning probability for the small hits is a constant winning probability (about 1/200) regardless of the big win lottery probability status. In this respect, the personality is different from the big hit whose fluctuation probability varies depending on the big hit lottery probability state. To.

  As a result of this winning lottery (pre-fetch winning determination), when “big hit” is won, “5 AH (big hit determination flag is ON)” is acquired as a big hit determination flag, and when it belongs to other determination values, 00H (big hit not won (big hit determination flag is OFF)) ”is acquired. In addition, when “small hit” is won, “5 AH (small hit determination flag is ON)” is acquired as a small hit determination flag, and when it belongs to other determination values, “00H (small hit non-winning) is acquired. (The small hit determination flag is OFF)) ”is acquired. Therefore, when the big hit determination random number value belongs to the determination value that is the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, neither “big hit” nor “small hit” has been won. Thus, the current winning determination result is “lost” (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are in the OFF state).

  Here, in the present embodiment, the result of the process in step S317 is not stored in the RAM 203 while being held in the register included in the CPU 201, but the random number determination process is skipped, and the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 is performed. Proceed to The reason is as follows.

  The determination result obtained in this random number determination process, that is, the data of the winning lottery result in the prefetch determination is immediately used in the subsequent “special stop symbol data creation process”, and this data is not required thereafter. Therefore, there is no problem even if the determination result is left in the register without being stored in the RAM 203 and the random number determination process is exited. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the random number determination process (the determination result of the winning determination process in the winning process (winning result related to the pre-reading determination)), and is dedicated for storing the determination result. Since it is not necessary to provide a separate storage area, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity of the ROM and RAM and reduce the control burden.

  The above step S317 is based on the lottery determination random number (first game information) stored on hold, and the lottery result by the lottery means (the special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process in step S409 in FIG. 12) It acts as a first prefetch determination means for prefetching before the reserved memory is used for the special symbol variable display operation. Further, the above-described steps S352 to S353 in FIG. 11 are based on the fall determination random number (second game information) stored on hold, and the lottery means (falling determination process in step S408 in FIG. 12: step S422 in FIG. 13). It serves as a second prefetch determination means for prefetching whether or not the reserved memory is subjected to the special symbol variation display operation as to whether or not the ball will fall in the falling lottery in S423).

  When the random number determination process in step S317 is completed, a special stop symbol data creation process is then performed (step S318). This special stop symbol data creation processing is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' processing, and here, 'prefetch determination (prefetch symbol determination: pre-determining "symbol lottery" related to the current operation holding ball. (Pre-judgment of winning (winning) type)) '. The random number determination process (step S317) to the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318) is a process related to the "pre-reading determination" in which the big hit lottery result is pre-readed.

  In the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318, first, a winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S317 is acquired, and a symbol table (explained later) according to the winning lottery result (separate big hit, small hit, and lost). Large hit symbol table, small hit symbol table, lose symbol table: not shown). Then, the random number value for special symbol determination acquired in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination, the symbol lottery for the current action holding ball, that is, the current action hold The lottery result (the symbol lottery result at the start of variation) of “special stop symbol creation processing (see step S410 of FIG. 12 described later)” executed when the ball is subjected to the variable display operation is pre-readed.

(T-2. Symbol table)
In the symbol table, a “special symbol determination random value (the size of the special symbol determination random value: 200)” and a determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type are defined in association with each other. More specifically, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are determined depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random number value belongs to.

  The “special symbol determination data” is data for identifying a winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type). In the case of this embodiment, 2R short open latent big hit, 15R probability change Big hits, small hit types (if there are multiple types of small hits, the type (for example, small hit A, small hit B, etc.)), loss type (if there are multiple types of lost, the type (for example, loss A, B or the like)) is data for identifying which one has been won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S411 in FIG. 12 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S412 and a process related to execution control of jackpot game) This is data used in the special electric accessory management process (step S060 in FIG. 8).

  The “special stop symbol number” is data for designating a special stop symbol form to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and is used when specifying the stop symbol type of the special symbol on the main control unit 20 side. The In the present embodiment, even in the case of the same 15R probability variation jackpot, depending on the judgment value, the display mode of the special stop symbol displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (in this embodiment, the display mode of "7 segment") May be different.

(T-2-1. Jackpot symbol table)
The jackpot symbol table of the present embodiment includes a “big hit symbol table 1” for the special symbol 1 related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a “big hit symbol table 2” for the special symbol 2 related to the special symbol variation display game 2. In the special figure 1 start opening check process, "big hit symbol table 1" is referred to, and during the special figure 2 start opening check process, "big hit symbol table 2" is referred to.

  In these jackpot symbol tables, a special symbol judgment random number value and a judgment value for determining the jackpot type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol judgment random number value is set to any judgment value. Depending on whether or not it belongs, any one of a plurality of types of jackpots is determined. In the jackpot symbol table 1, for example, when the special symbol determination random number value falls within the range of the determination values 0 to 139, the “2R probability variation big hit” is won (symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability): 140/200), When it falls within the range of the judgment values 140 to 199, “15R probable big hit” is won (symbol selection rate: 60/200), and the big hit type is determined by a predetermined symbol selection rate, and corresponding special symbol judgment data and special symbols are selected. The stop symbol number is determined.

  The jackpot symbol table 2 has the same basic configuration as the above jackpot symbol table 1, but differs from the jackpot symbol table 1 in the following points. The jackpot symbol table 2 is different from the jackpot symbol table 1 in a specific jackpot symbol selection rate (symbol lottery probability). Specifically, when the special symbol determination random number value falls within the range of the determination value 0 to 39, the “2R probability variation big hit” wins (symbol selection rate: 40/200), and it belongs to the determination value range of 40 to 199. In this case, “15R probable big hit” is won (design selection rate: 160/200). That is, the symbol lottery with the jackpot symbol table 2 is more likely to be selected than the symbol lottery with the jackpot symbol table 1, which is a symbol lottery advantageous to the player. As a result, the game development is more advantageous for the player to receive the lottery of the special symbol variation display game 2 than the special symbol variation display game 1. In particular, in the state with the electric support, the winning probability on the lower start opening 35 side is dramatically improved and the execution chance of the special symbol variation display game 2 is increased, so that the state with the electric support is a high base game state. In addition to the symbol lottery, the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

  In the process of step S318, the various data obtained from the above-described symbol table (the symbol lottery result in the pre-reading determination: special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) remains in the state held in the register included in the CPU 201 (for example, special The symbol determination data is not stored in the A register, the special stop symbol number is the B register), and is not stored in the RAM 203. The special stop symbol data creation process is exited, and the process proceeds to the start opening winning random number determination process in step S319. The reason is as follows.

  In this embodiment, various data of the determination result (the symbol lottery result in the pre-reading determination) obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process this time is immediately used in the subsequent “start opening winning random number determination process”, and this No data is needed. Therefore, there is no particular problem even if the special stop symbol data creation process is exited while the determination result is stored in the register without being stored in the RAM 203. This eliminates the need for a program for storing the determination result of the special stop symbol data creation process in the RAM, and does not require a dedicated storage area for storing the determination result. As a result, the memory capacity can be reduced and the control burden can be reduced.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 described above is completed, a starting port winning random number determination process in step S319 is then performed. This start opening winning random number determination process is also performed as part of the 'look-ahead determination' process, similar to the random number determination process (step S317) and the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318). 'Prefetching determination (prefetching variation pattern determination)' is performed in advance to determine the “variation pattern at the start of variation” relating to the operation hold ball.

  In the start opening winning random number determination process, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S317, the 'symbol lottery' result obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318, and the process in step S314. Using the obtained 'random number for variation pattern', the variation pattern at the start of variation related to the current suspended ball, that is, the "special symbol" that is executed when the current suspended ball is subjected to the variation display operation The result (variation pattern content at the start of variation) of the variation pattern creation process (see S412 in FIG. 12 to be described later) is determined in advance. Then, based on the prefetch determination result, a process for creating winning command data used for creating a “winning command” described later is performed. Here, the command data on the “MODE_1 (first byte (upper byte))” side that can specify at least the winning lottery result (separate / losing) as the winning command data, and the contents of the look-ahead variation pattern can be specified. “EVENT (second byte (low-order byte)) side command data is acquired. Based on the winning command data determined in the starting opening winning random number determination process, the pre-reading variation pattern (excluding reserved ball number information) is obtained. In the case of Embodiment 1, the upper byte is data that makes it possible to specify information on the winning lottery and the falling lottery result (falling lottery result, winning lottery result).

  When the start opening winning random number determination process in step S319 is completed, a “winning command” is created based on the command data determined in the starting opening winning random number determination process (step S320A), and then the operation at the time of prefetch determination is performed. A “hold addition command” for designating the number of balls to be held is created (step S320). This “hold addition command” is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper byte (MODE) side for designating whether the operation holding ball to be prefetched this time is the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side, and at the time of winning a prize And the lower byte (EVENT) side for designating the number of active balls to be held. The hold addition command is used when the production control unit 24 side informs the hold display areas 76 and 77 of information relating to the current number of active hold balls or when a pre-reading notice effect is executed when an active hold ball is generated. Is used when a pre-reading notice effect (holding display change type pre-reading notice effect) for the notice target hold is displayed.

  Next, the created winning command and the pending addition command are transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S321).

  When the winning command and the hold addition command are transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 that receives them receives a lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) regarding whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice effect based on information included in these commands. ), And if it is determined that the result is determined to be feasible (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the pre-reading notice effect for the current operation holding ball is displayed. In addition, when receiving the winning command and / or the hold addition command, the production control unit 24 notifies the start opening of the winning prize regardless of whether or not the pre-reading notice production is displayed. Can appear.

  In addition, even when there is a new winning when the number of active balls is 4 or more, a winning command for designating an overflow and a pending addition command (hereinafter referred to as “OF command”) are created. Then, it is transmitted to the production control unit 24 (step S312: YES → step S320A).

  Thus, the special figure 1 starting port check process in step S301 is exited, and then the special figure 2 starting port check process in step S302 in FIG. 9 is performed.

(10-3. Special symbol variation start processing: FIG. 12)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process of FIG.

  In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero (step S401). If the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), Proceeding to the process of S403, the process at the start of change (steps S403 to S416) for the special figure 2 operation holding ball for the present change display is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is zero (step S402). If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the process proceeds to step S403, and the process related to the start of the variation of the special symbol for the special figure 1 operation holding ball to be used for the current variation display (steps S403 to S403). S416) is performed. Which one of the special FIG. 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is subjected to the variable display operation preferentially by the processing of steps S401 and S402 (which operation holding ball is preferentially digested)? The “priority change ranking” is determined. In this embodiment, when there is an operation holding ball in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested, that is, the special symbol variation display game 1. The special symbol fluctuation display game 2 is preferentially executed rather than the game.

  When the number of the operation hold balls of both the special figure 2 operation hold ball number and the special figure 1 operation hold ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), a state of “no operation hold ball” is set. . This “no operation hold ball” state is when the special symbol is on standby and there is no hold memory, and the effect control unit 24 side is informed that it has entered this state, and the liquid crystal display The device 36 is controlled to switch to a demonstration screen display for waiting for customers. Therefore, when “no operation hold ball” is reached, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H)” indicating the state of “no operation hold ball”. (Step S417).

  When the determination process of step S417 is passed, that is, when the state of “no operation hold ball” is entered, and the special symbol operation status at this time is “standby (01H)” (step S417: NO: Refer to step S472 in the special symbol confirmation time process of FIG. 17A described later), and the special symbol operation status is switched to “standby (00H)” (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status: step S418). Then, a “demonstration display command” for displaying a demonstration screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. If the presentation control unit 24 does not receive any presentation control command (for example, a winning command or a hold addition command) related to the symbol variation display game even after a predetermined time has elapsed since receiving the demonstration display command, the variation display operation is performed. Assuming that a state where the game is not performed for a certain period of time (a waiting state for waiting for customers) has occurred, the liquid crystal display device 36 performs “demo screen display” for notifying that the game is waiting.

  When the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), or when the special figure 2 operation reservation ball number is zero but the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is not zero (step S401: YES → step) S402: NO), the process (steps S403 to S416) related to the start of the variation of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display is performed. In addition, about the process of step S403-S416 demonstrated below, when it is "NO" by determination of said step S401, it is the process for the special figure 2 action holding ball, and by determination of said step S402. In the case of NO ′, the processing is performed for the special FIG. 1 operation holding ball, but the processing method is substantially the same. Therefore, in order to avoid duplicate description, unless otherwise required, it is not possible to distinguish whether the process is for the special design 1 side operation hold ball or the special design 2 side operation hold ball. I will explain it.

  When the processing proceeds to step S403, 1 is subtracted from the number of reserved balls for operation (the number of reserved balls for operation on the special symbol side used for the current variation display operation-1: step S403), and the number of reserved balls for operation after subtraction is included. A “hold subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S404). With this hold subtraction command, the production control unit 24 side grasps the number of remaining operation hold balls after the current operation hold ball number digestion.

  Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the current variation start side. For example, if special symbol 1 is the variation start side, “00H” is indicated, and special symbol 2 is the variation start side. If there is, “01H” is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

  Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of Steps S406 to S407, the hold data (the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern use) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1. The random number is read and stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage area (the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, the reserved 4 memory) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4). The hold data stored in the area) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to 'n-1' (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to provide a free area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number n of the operation reservation balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and any of the operation reservation balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is stored. Whether the area corresponds to the area is specified, and the storage of a new operation holding ball becomes possible.

  In the case of the first embodiment, the process proceeds to the fall determination process (step S408) after step S407. However, in the case of the second and third embodiments, as indicated by the broken line in FIG. It is checked whether there is a remaining power support number (step S407A: YES), a remaining power support number command is transmitted (step S407B), and the process proceeds to the fall determination process in step S408. If there is no remaining power support count (step S407A: NO), the process proceeds to the fall determination process in step S408 without transmitting this command.

(10-3-1. Falling determination processing: FIG. 13)
FIG. 13 shows details of the fall determination process in step S408 (FIG. 12). This is a fall determination process that is performed when the special symbol variation display operation starts, that is, at the start of the variation, and is performed prior to the hit determination process (special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process: step S409). First, it is determined whether or not the gaming state at the start of the current variation is a probability variation state, that is, whether or not a special symbol probability variation state flag described later is ON (= 5 AH) (step S421). When the special symbol probability change state flag is ON (step S421: = 5AH), the random number for fall determination acquired in step S314 (FIG. 10) is determined by the determination table (step S422), and the variation start of the symbol game is started. Is determined whether or not the falling lottery is won (step S423).

  If it is determined that the falling lottery is won as a determination at the time of starting the variation of the symbol game (step S423: YES), the special symbol probability variation state flag is turned OFF, the special symbol short-time state flag is turned OFF, and the current game The notification LED output number for reporting the status information is set to 00H (OFF) (step S424). When the special symbol probability changing state flag is turned from ON to OFF, the judgment base of the big win lottery probability state shifts (falls) from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S425, and a fall command is transmitted for control by the main control unit 20 (step S355). This fall command is transmitted separately during the electric support (during electric support) in which the open extension function is activated and in a high base state and during other states. Then, the process ends, and the process returns to step S408 in FIG.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol probability change state flag is not set (step S421: ≠ 5A), the process is terminated without determining the fall determination random number, and if the fall lottery is not won (step S423: The process is terminated without doing anything (NO), and the process proceeds to step S409 in FIG.

  In the case of the “ST machine type” of the fourth embodiment and the “type including a plurality of types of jackpots with a short time” of the fifth embodiment are non-falling type models. Therefore, in the case of the fourth and fifth embodiments, the fall determination process (step S408) is not performed, and the processes of steps S407A and S407B are performed. In the case of the fourth embodiment, the probability variation state is continued up to the ST specified number of times. Therefore, in step S407A, in order to count the ST period, a special symbol time reduction counter (the number of remaining times until the special symbol time reduction state ends) is described. It is determined whether or not the counter for counting the remaining number is zero, and if there is a remaining number of times (ST number), a “remaining power support number command” including the remaining number information is sent to the effect control unit 24. Transmit (step S407B). In the case of the fifth embodiment, the time reduction state continues until the predetermined number of times, so in step S407A, as in the case of the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter is zero, and the remaining time reduction times are determined. If there is, the “remaining power support number command” including the remaining number information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S407B). By this “remaining power support number command”, the effect control unit 24 side can grasp the remaining ST number. Thus, the remaining ST number information is notified using the effect means, or the firing guidance notification switching timing (the symbol variation display game at which the ST ends) is grasped, and the firing guidance notification effect (here) Then, switching from right-handed to left-handed notification) can be displayed.

(10-3-2. S407A to S408 in FIG. 12)
Returning to FIG. 12, after step S408, a special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process is performed (step S409). In this special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed using the jackpot determination random number value. The random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory operates in the same manner as the “random determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10)” that is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “winning lottery” is performed. Here, the “winning lottery” in the “determination at the start of change” for the operation holding ball used for the current change display operation is performed. Since the processing procedure of the random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is practically the same as the random determination process (step S319 in FIG. 10), the description will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  Here, first, a hit random number determination table corresponding to the current variation display side is acquired based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. This winning random number determination table is the same as the winning random number determination table used in the random number determination process (step S317 in FIG. 10). Next, the big hit determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and another winning lottery of big hit, small hit, and lose is performed based on the big hit determination random value and the hit random number determination table, The result is stored in the hit determination flag area of the RAM 203.

  If this winning lottery (winning lottery at the start of change) results in a “big hit” win, the big hit determination flag is set to “5 AH (the big hit determination flag is ON)”, and it belongs to other determination values Is “00H (big hit not won (big hit determination flag is OFF))”. In addition, when the “small hit” win is set, the small hit determination flag is set to “5 AH (small hit determination flag is ON)”, and when belonging to other determination values, “00H (small hit non-winning) is set. (The small hit determination flag is in the OFF state)) ”. Therefore, when the big hit determination random number value belongs to the determination value that is the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won, The current winning determination result is “lost” (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are in the OFF state).

  Here, the reason for storing in the RAM 203 the data obtained by the random determination processing for special electric accessory operation determination in step S409 is as follows. The data (big hit determination flag, small hit determination flag) obtained in the random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is like the data obtained in the “random number determination process (step S317 in FIG. 10)” in the prefetch determination. This is not the data that is immediately used in the subsequent processing and is unnecessary thereafter, but is the data that is required in the special stop symbol creation processing (step S410) later.

  When the random determination process for special electric accessory operation determination in step S409 is completed, a special stop symbol creation process is then performed (step S410). In this special stop symbol creation process, using the winning lottery result and the special symbol determination random number value of the special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process of step S409, the “symbol lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed. Do. The special stop symbol creation process is a process that performs the same function as the “special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10)” that is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “symbol drawing” is performed. However, here, the “symbol drawing” is performed in the “determination at the start of variation” for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation. Since the basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation process is the same as that of the special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 10), in order to avoid duplication, the description will be omitted as appropriate.

  Here, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data and the winning lottery result (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag) obtained in the random determination processing for the special electric accessory operation determination in step S409 are acquired, and based on these , One of the big hit symbol table, the small hit symbol table, and the lost symbol table is selected. This symbol table is the same as the symbol table used in the special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10). Next, a special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random value, the “symbol selection lottery” related to the current special symbol variation display game is performed. The symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) is stored in a predetermined region (special symbol determination data storage region, special symbol stop symbol number storage region) of the RAM 203. Thereby, the winning type (winning type) related to the current special symbol variation display game is determined.

  Here, the reason why the data obtained by the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is stored in the RAM 203 is as follows. The data (special symbol determination data, special stop symbol number) obtained in the special stop symbol creation processing is subsequent to the data obtained in the “special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 10)” at the time of prefetch determination. This is because it is not data that is immediately used in the process and is not necessary thereafter, but data that is required in the later special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412) or the special electric accessory process (step S60).

  When the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is then performed (step S411). In the game state transition preparation process, a setting process necessary for designating a game state after a winning game is performed as a setting for shifting the game state. Specifically, according to the big hit type, it is necessary to specify a game state to be transferred after a win game, such as a probability change state, a short time state, a latent probability state, CZ (normal), CZ (latent probability), normal state, etc. Various data are stored in a predetermined transition state buffer. The data stored in the transition state buffer is used in the jackpot end process (step S509) described later.

  As various data to specify the game state, there is a general electric utility release extension state flag (a flag for specifying the operation state of the open extension function (presence / absence of electric support state)), normal symbol short time state flag (normal symbol short time function) ), Normal symbol probability change state flag (ordinary symbol probability change function operation state (flag for specifying the lottery probability status per auxiliary)), special symbol short state flag (special symbol short time function Flag for specifying the operating state), special symbol probability changing state flag (flag for specifying the operating state of the special symbol probability changing function (big win lottery probability state)), special symbol short time counter (operation of the special symbol short time function ( Counter for counting the number of remaining times until the special symbol short-time state is completed), special symbol probability variation counter (operation of the special symbol probability variation function (high probability state)) Counter for counting the number of remaining until the end), and the special symbol variation counter (counter for counting the number of times of the change in the special symbols for updating the variation pattern allocation specified number), and the like. Depending on the setting state of these flags and counters, the operating state of the functions related to special symbols and normal symbols is determined, and the gaming state is determined. In addition, about these flags and counters, what is necessary is just to provide data required in order to implement | achieve the model of each type of Embodiment 1-6.

  When the game state transition preparation process in step S411 is completed, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is then performed (step S412). In this special symbol variation pattern creation process, the symbol lottery result of the special stop symbol creation process (at least the winning lottery result obtained by the random determination process for the operation of the special electric accessory operation), the random number for the variation pattern, the variation pattern allocation designation number Using the (Tcode) (current game state) and the number of active reserve balls, etc., the special symbol change pattern for the active hold ball used for the current change display operation, that is, “change pattern at the start of change” Is determined by lottery. Then, a “variation pattern designation command” that can specify the contents of the variation pattern is created and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 side.

  When the special symbol variation pattern creation processing in step 412 is finished, 5AH (ON state) is then stored in a special symbol N variation flag (N = 1, 2) designating that variation display is in progress (step S413). . The “special symbol N changing flag” is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), the special symbol changes. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

  Next, a decorative symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 (step S414) and transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes, an upper byte (MODE) for designating a special symbol type on the variable side, and a lower byte (EVENT) for designating a big hit type, a small hit type, and a loss type. Therefore, the decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning category (symbol lottery result). Specifically, for the upper byte (MODE) side, “B5H” is set when the special symbol on the variable side is special symbol 1, “B6H” is set when the special symbol is 2, and the lower byte (EVENT). On the side, “01H” is set when the winning type is lost, “02H” is set when the 15R probability variable big hit is set, “03H” is set when the 2R short open latent big hit is set, “ 04H "is set. In the first to sixth embodiments, data that can specify the winning type is set in the lower byte (EVNET), but data that can specify the special stop symbol number or the special symbol determination data may be used. Since this decoration symbol designation command includes information related to the winning type, on the production control unit 24 side, mainly the combination of decoration symbols (the symbol type that constitutes the reach symbol) when forming the reach state, This is used when determining a combination of decoration symbols (decoration stop symbols) to be finally stopped and a notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game.

  Then, as the change start time setting process, the special symbol operation status is changed to “Fluctuating (02H)” (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and the random number storage area for determination is cleared to zero (stores 00H) (step S416). ).

  As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) of FIG. 9 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started.

  In the special symbol changing process (step S307), it is monitored whether or not the special symbol is changing, that is, whether or not the special symbol change time has elapsed. As a command, a process of transmitting a “variation stop command” to the effect control unit 24, a fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special symbol operation status is “confirming (03H)”. And (for example, 03H is stored in the special symbol operation status). The “variation stop command” is a command indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended. With this variation stop command, the effect control unit 24 ends the special symbol variation display game after the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed. (End) and stop displaying the decorative symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated along with the termination of the special symbol variation display game. The “determined display time” is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the special symbol change display is finished and the special symbol is stopped.

  Further, in the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308), it is monitored whether or not the above-described fixed display time has passed. If the fixed display time has passed, it is determined that the special symbol fluctuation display game has ended, The symbol action status is switched to “standby (01H)” (01H is stored in the special symbol action status), and if this special symbol variation display game is a big hit, the processing required to start the big hit game (stop big hit symbol) If it is a small hit, the processing required to start the small hit game (various setting processing when the small hit symbol is stopped) is performed. In the various setting processing when the big hit symbol is stopped, the big hit determination flag, the power utility release extended state flag, the normal symbol short state flag, the normal symbol certain change state flag, the special symbol short state flag, the special symbol certain change state flag, the special symbol short time Each of the number counter, special symbol probability variation counter, and special symbol variation counter is cleared (stores 00H), and the condition device operation flag is turned on (stores 5AH). In various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped, the small hit determination flag is cleared (00H is stored), and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit determining flag.

  In addition, the special symbol short-time counter (remaining number of special symbol short-time states), special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count), and special symbol variation counter are monitored. As counters for the symbol variation display game, for counters that are not zero, the counter is decremented by 1.

  If the special symbol short-time counter after subtraction is zero, setting processing at the time of short-time end is performed on the assumption that the number of times of completion of the special symbol short-time state has been reached in this game. Here, as the setting processing at the time-shortening end, each of the utility power release extended state flag, the normal symbol time-short state flag, the normal symbol probability variation state flag, and the special symbol time-short state flag is cleared, and the variation pattern allocation specification A predetermined value (for example, 00H indicating a normal state) is stored in the number (Tcode), and a special symbol short-time state is ended (electrical support no state transition information) “short-time end command” as a production control command It transmits to the control part 24. As a result, from the next game, the player is placed in a state without power support. Since the short time end command is transmitted at the end of the current symbol variation display game, the production control unit 24 can grasp that the next game will be in the “no electric support state” before the start of the next game, The effect mode can be switched (the background image is switched) before the start of the next game, or the firing guidance notification effect (in this case, switching from right-handed to left-handed notification) can be displayed at an appropriate timing. .

  Also, if the special symbol probability change counter after subtraction is zero, setting processing at the end of probability change is performed on the assumption that the number of times of termination of the special symbol probability change state has been reached in the current game. Here, as the transition setting process to the normal gaming state at the end of the latent probability state or the probability changing state, the normal utility release extended state flag, the normal symbol short state flag, the normal symbol probable state flag, the special symbol short state flag, In addition, each of the special symbol probability change state flags is cleared, and if necessary, a predetermined value (for example, 00H indicating the normal state) is stored in the change pattern assignment designation number (Tcode). Thereby, from the next game, the jackpot lottery probability is placed from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is zero, the game state transition setting process is performed on the assumption that the special symbol variation number has reached the prescribed number of gaming state transitions. Here, the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is updated. For example, when CZ (04H) is completed, it is updated to a variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) that designates “normal state (00H)”, or the first half interval (for example, up to 30 variations) during the ST period. When dividing into three sections of the second half section (for example, up to 93 times of variation) and the last section (for example, up to 100 times of variation), it is assumed that the prescribed number of game state transitions has been reached at the end of each section Then, it is updated to the variation pattern distribution designation number (Tcode) for designating the next section. Also, when the change pattern assignment designation number (Tcode) is changed to a new one, a “game state designation command” including game state transition information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The effect control unit 24 can grasp the transition of the gaming state by the gaming state designation command.

<11. Special Electric Property Management Process: Fig. 14>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S060) in FIG. 8 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S060.

  In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hitting flag (step S501). When the small hitting flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S501: = 5AH), the small hit for controlling a series of operations of the special variable winning device (open / closed opening / closing control) related to the small hit game. A process is performed (step S504), and this special electric accessory management process is exited.

  If the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH) and is not in the big hit game. Exit the special electric property management process.

  When the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S502: = 5AH), processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric accessory status branching process). . The “special electric accessory operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable prize winning devices 42 and 52. This status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM 203 is stored. Stored in

  In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, a process corresponding to the special electric accessory operation status value is called and executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special electric accessory is “starting process (00H)”, the big hit start process (step S505) is performed. In the case where the accessory actuating start process (step S506) is in operation (02H), the special electric accessory actuating process (step S507) is in effect. In the case where the accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) is “ending process (04H)”, the jackpot end process (step S509) is called and executed. By these processes, the operation of the special variable winning device 52 related to the big hit game is controlled. Here, “being started (00H)” indicates that the player is in a standby state before the jackpot game starts, and “operation start process (01H)” is that the player is in a standby state before starting the round game. “In operation (02H)” indicates that a round game is being executed, and “Continuing determination (03H)” indicates that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. “Big jackpot end process in progress (04H)” indicates that the big hit game is ending. When one of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is completed, the special electric accessory management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

  The big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509) and the small hit game control process (step S504) will be described below.

(11-1. Big hit start processing)
First, the big hit starting process (step S505) will be described.

  At the start of the big hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to “starting process (00H)” of the initial status value. Therefore, when a big hit is made, the big hit starting process is first performed.

  Here, as a setting process at the time of starting the big hit game necessary for starting the big hit game, 5 AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operation device operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to “operation start process”. "Middle (01H)" (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and 01H is stored in the continuous number counter. The above-mentioned “actual accessory continuous actuating device operation flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the accessory continuous actuating device. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the accessory continuous actuating device is operating. This indicates that the round game can be continued, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is inactive (round game cannot be continued). The “continuous number counter” is a counter for managing the number of continuous executions of the round game, and the current round number is stored here. Since “01H” is set in the continuous number counter here, the current round number indicates the 1Rth.

  Next, a “big hit start setting table (not shown)” is acquired. In this “big hit start setting table”, the maximum number of rounds (specified round number data), round display LED number (specified round number display data), and start interval time are determined according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type). The main control unit 20 refers to the jackpot start setting table and stores each data corresponding to the current jackpot type in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203. The “start interval time” is an interval interval from when the special symbol fixed display time has elapsed and the jackpot is determined until the special variable winning device 52 is activated, and is defined as the interval during which the opening effect is performed. Refers to the time span.

  Next, a “hit hit command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the process goes to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG. The “big hit start command” is information that can specify the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit (for example, the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of the big win (fluctuation pattern allocation designation number ( Tcode) and / or internal game status information), in addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, a series of winning effects (opening corresponding to each jackpot type) developed during the big hit game on the side of the effect control unit 24 It is also used when determining a production, a round production, a round end production, an ending production, and the like.

(11-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the special electric accessory operation start process (step S506) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. In this special symbol accessory operation timer, “interval time before starting round game” is set. As the interval time, in the first round (1R), the “start interval time” set in the jackpot start process in step S505 is monitored. When passing through step S506), “interval time before opening (interval time set in special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) described later)” is monitored. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, if the interval time before opening (in the case of the first round (1R)) has elapsed, the “large winning opening / closing operation setting process” is performed. In this special winning opening / closing operation setting process, the opening / closing operation pattern of the special winning opening 50 is set according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type) and the current number of rounds. Specifically, the special prize opening / closing operation time for opening / closing the special prize opening 50 (for example, 29.8 seconds for the long opening pattern and 0.1 second for the short opening pattern) is used as a special symbol. The solenoid control data for controlling the special winning opening solenoid 52c is set in the physical operation timer. The solenoid control data is changed according to the value of the special symbol accessory operation timer. When the special prize opening / closing operation setting process is completed, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Active (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special electric accessory management process is exited. Then, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

(11-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, the special electric accessory operating process (step S507) will be described.

  Here, first, the maximum winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process is performed. In the grand prize opening maximum winning number confirmation process, the number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50 is counted, whether or not the number of winning balls has reached the maximum winning number, and when the maximum winning number is reached. Clears the special symbol accessory action timer. As a result, the timer value set in the special electric accessory activation start process in step S506 is forcibly set to zero, and the open large winning opening 50 is closed when the maximum winning number is reached. Yes. After finishing the process of confirming the maximum number of winning prizes, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, and until the timer value reaches zero ( Or, until the maximum number of winnings is reached, do nothing and exit the special electric accessory operating process.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (when the maximum number of winnings has been reached or the opening time for the special prize opening has elapsed), the special electric accessory action status is determined as the end of the current round game. Switch to “Continue judgment (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), the remaining ball discharge time (for example, 1980ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operating process The process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process in step S061 in FIG.

(11-4. Special electric equipment operation continuation determination process)
Next, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the remaining symbol discharge time (1980 ms) after closing the big prize opening is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. Determined. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (remaining ball discharge time elapses), the continuous number counter is acquired to determine whether the current number of rounds has reached the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds). judge. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, 1 is added to the continuation counter (+1) as the process for continuing the round game, and the “interval before opening” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. The object operation status is switched to “operation starting process (01H)” (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). As a result, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

  When the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, the “end interval time” is stored in the special symbol accessory action timer, and then the special electric accessory action status is displayed as various setting processes at the end of the round game. Switch to “End processing (04H)” (04H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). The above “end interval time” is an interval interval from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and is a time that defines the interval in which the ending effect is performed Refers to the width.

  Then, a “big hit end command” for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the process exits the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process and proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG. . The “big hit end command” includes information regarding the current big hit type and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, that is, information that can specify the gaming state after the big hit game is finished. It is also used when determining the production mode. It should be noted that the above-mentioned “information regarding the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit” may include information regarding the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and the internal gaming state. As a result, when the game state at the time of winning the big hit is “CZ”, it is possible to specify whether the CZ was “CZ (normal)” or “CZ (latency)”. The production mode after the end of the big hit game can be correctly shifted.

(11-5. Big hit end processing)
Next, the big hit end process (S509) will be described.

  Here, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the end interval time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined whether or not the end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory action timer becomes zero, nothing is done and the jackpot end process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the end interval time elapses), the data in the transition state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process in step S411 during the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 12) is stored. Use this to set the gaming state after the big hit game. Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit game is specified. Next, various data (condition device operation flag, accessory continuous operation device operation flag, continuous number counter, maximum round number, round display LED number, various buffers, etc.) used during the big hit game control processing are cleared and special The electric accessory operation status is switched to “Starting process (00H)” (00H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

  When the jackpot ending process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed. After exiting the big hit end process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(11-6. Small hit processing)
Next, the small hit process (step S504) will be described.

  In the small hit game, the “round game” like the big hit game is not executed. Therefore, as described above, the operation mode during the small hit game is “2R big hit game” (in this embodiment, only “2R latent hit big hit” is provided. Is provided, the process for controlling the opening / closing operation pattern of the big prize opening is performed so as to be substantially the same as the operation mode of (including both).

  When the small hit processing is entered, first, the “start interval time” in the small hit game is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and a “small hit start command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. . After the start interval has elapsed, a small hit game state transition preparation process for designating a gaming state after the small hit game, which will be described later, is performed, and then the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 50 is “2R system big hit game”. Solenoid control data for controlling the prize winning solenoid is set so as to be the same or very similar operation mode. As a result, the big winning opening 50 is opened like a 2R type big hit game, and a pseudo round game during the small hit game is executed. In addition, the maximum number of winnings to the big winning opening 50 during the small hit game is the same as that by the big winning (for example, 9), and when the maximum winning number is reached, the big winning opening 50 is shifted to the closed state. The However, since the round game like the big hit game is not executed in the small hit game, the pseudo round game itself is ended when the maximum winning number is reached.

  When a series of opening / closing operations of the big prize opening 50 is completed, a “small hit end command” instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The “small hit end command” includes information that can specify the type of the small hit this time and the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit, and the effect control unit 24 determines the post-small hit effect mode. It is also used when Therefore, in addition to the role of instructing the start of the ending effect, this small hit end command also plays a role as a gaming state designation command for designating the gaming state, and an effect that functions in the same way as the “big winning end command” related to the big hit game Control command.

<12: Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 15 to 23>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 to 23, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the side of the effect control unit 24 mainly includes a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 15) and a timer interrupt process (effect control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 17).

<13. Production control side main processing: FIG. 15>
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing main processing on the production control unit side (production control side main processing). The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG.

  In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S071). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, moving object starting point return processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of CPU internal register values including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process in step S071 is completed, the main loop process in steps S073 to S078 is performed at predetermined time intervals as the process during normal operation, and otherwise the effect soft random number update process in step S079 is repeated.

  In the process of step S072, the CPU 241 refers to the counter value for main loop update period and determines whether or not the main loop update period that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S072). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in a main loop update process (step S096 in FIG. 17) during an effect control side timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms. Until this main loop update period arrives (step S072: NO), various effect lottery random numbers are updated (step S079: various effect soft random number update processing).

  When the main loop update period has arrived (step S072: YES), the CPU 241 performs a received command analysis process (step S073). In this received command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read and the effect control process corresponding to the read effect control command is read. I do. This effect control command includes the already described hold addition command, hold subtraction command, variation pattern designation command, decorative symbol designation command, variation stop command, and the like.

  For example, when at least a variation pattern designation command (in this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command and a decorative symbol designation command) is received and stored in the reception buffer, information ( One or more types of effect patterns are determined based on the variation pattern information and the winning information (or winning type information). The effect pattern determined here works as a “part effect” as an element constituting the effect scenario. Next, determine the time schedule for how and at what timing the production pattern (parts production) determined above will appear, and compose the production scenario. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Various production patterns (part production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing an “production scenario” in a broad sense. When the “button notice effect” is incorporated in the determined effect scenario, the “non-operation effect scenario” when the frame effect button 13 is not operated is constructed as a basic effect scenario. When the frame effect button 13 is operated during the button notice effect, the non-operation effect scenario needs to be changed to the “operation effect scenario” when the frame effect button 13 is operated. Such a process relating to scenario change is performed in “scenario update process” in step S074 described below.

  When the received command analysis process in step S073 is completed, a scenario update process is performed (step S074). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer necessary for execution of the production pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, the time within the variation period (decoration symbol variation period) in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed is within the same period as the variation period (special symbol variation period) in which the special symbol is variably displayed. On this axis, a time schedule for what kind of production pattern is made to appear in the production means with what time width is managed by this timer. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in an effect process related to an LED data update process (step S075) and an effect agent control data update process (step S077) which will be described later. Here, this production scenario timer is monitored, and when the production time of one production comes, the sound data for the speaker 46 and the liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243, respectively. . The LED data for the light display device is created by an LED data update process (step S075) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by an after-mentioned effect actor control data update process (step 077). The

  Next, LED data update processing is performed (step S075). In this LED data update process, LED data for a light display device such as a decorative lamp unit 45 or an LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. The data created here is used in an effect LED management process (step S095 in FIG. 17) during a timer interrupt process to be described later.

  Next, sound output processing is performed (step S076). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S074 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a sound effect is output from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). Thereby, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

  Next, a production accessory control data update process is performed (step S077). In the effect accessory control data update process, drive control data for the movable object accessory motors 61, 61a, 61b, 63, 73a is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer. The data created here is used in a director action operation management process (step S094 in FIG. 17) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, noise countermeasure management processing for monitoring malfunction of the sound source LSI or the like is performed (step S078). If the program goes into a runaway state due to a malfunction, the watchdog timer expires and the CPU is automatically reset to recover from the runaway state. Thereby, the main loop process is terminated, and the effect soft random number update process in step S079 is performed until the next main loop update period comes.

<14. Command reception interrupt processing: FIG. 16>
Next, a command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing on the effect control side. This command reception interruption process is executed preferentially over an effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 17) described later when an effect control command is received from the main control unit 20.

  First, when an interruption based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs during execution of the main process shown in FIG. The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243 (step S082), and the saved register contents are restored (step S083). Thereby, the command reception interrupt process is ended, the process returns to the effect control unit side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until an interrupt based on the next strobe signal is generated. As described above, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 are received, this command reception interrupt process is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Is done.

<15. Production control timer interrupt processing: FIG. 17>
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the timer interrupt process on the production control side will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interruption process. This production control side timer interruption process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 1 ms) from the CTC, and is executed by interruption during execution of the production control side main process.

  In FIG. 17, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S091) and then performs an effect button input management process (step S092). In this effect button input management process, whether or not an operation (ON operation) detection signal is input from the frame effect button 13 is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. To store. This information is used for the button notice effect.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S093). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S074) in the effect control side main process of FIG. 15, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). Thus, image display control for the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. Thereby, the image production along the production scenario is realized.

  Next, directing action operation management is performed (step S094). In this stage actor operation management, based on the motor drive control data for the movable body role created in the stage role control data update process (step S077), the movable body role motors 61, 61a, A control signal is output to 61b, 63, 73a. Thereby, the visual production | presentation by the movable body accessory along a production | presentation scenario is implement | achieved.

  Next, effect LED management is performed (step S095). In this effect LED management, based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S075), the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are turned on and blinked through the light display control unit. Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, a main loop update process for managing the main loop update period is performed (step S096). In this main loop update process, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that circulates in a range of multiples of 16 (for example, 0 to 31) by increment processing, for example.

  After the processing of steps S091 to S096 is completed, the saved register contents are restored (step S097). As a result, the timer interruption process is terminated, the process returns to the effect control side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<Contents of Received Command Analysis Process: FIGS. 18 to 23>
FIGS. 18 to 23 show processing closely related to the present invention among the processing executed in the received command analysis processing (step S073 in FIG. 15). Hereinafter, a case where a “command for winning a prize”, a “variation pattern designation command”, a “decoration symbol designation command”, and a specific command required for the firing guidance notification effect are received (stored) will be described.

<16. Winning command reception processing: FIG. 18>
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a winning command is received. The winning command handled here is an effect control command transmitted in step S321 of the start-port check process in FIG.

  In FIG. 18, when the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives a winning command, it first analyzes the contents of the winning command and acquires prefetch determination result information (step S710). Here, the acquired information is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the RAM 203. In the pre-read information storage area, the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2) as in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 A pre-read information storage area corresponding to the side). In addition, these pre-read information storage areas are provided with a hold 1 pre-read information storage area to a hold n pre-read information storage area (in this embodiment, n = 4) corresponding to the number of active hold balls. Prefetch determination result information for the number of balls can be stored.

  Although not shown, since the pending addition command transmitted in step S321 (FIG. 10) has already been received and stored, the content of the pending addition command is analyzed to obtain the retained ball count information (step S711). ).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a prefetch prohibition period (step 712). In the period in which prefetching should be prohibited, the treasure box effect is generated in the first to third embodiments, and in the fourth embodiment, the remaining number in the first half of the ST is less than 4, the remaining number in the second half of the ST is less than 4, There is one final remaining number. If a pre-reading notice effect occurs during a specific effect mode related to these sections, there is a possibility that a contradiction or a sense of incongruity may be brought about between the effect in the specific effect mode and the pre-reading notice effect. Therefore, while the game state stays in these sections, it is configured to bypass the pre-reading notice lottery process, and there is no inconsistency or discomfort between the effect made under the specific effect mode and the pre-reading effect notice. Like that. That is, if it is a prefetch prohibition period (step S712: YES), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step S719 described later.

  If it is not the prefetch prohibition period (step S712: NO), it is determined whether or not the “continuous notice counter” is zero (step S713). The “continuous notice counter” is a counter for setting a prohibition period for prohibiting the occurrence of the pre-read notice effect. Specifically, when the current operation-holding ball is set as the execution target of the pre-reading notice effect by the pre-reading notice lottery in step S714 described below (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the current operation-holding ball is digested. This is a counter for preventing the newly generated operation holding ball from being subject to execution of the pre-reading effect until it is subjected to the variable display operation. In the “continuous notice counter”, for the above-described reason, the value of the current number N of active suspended balls or the maximum number of retained operational balls (N = 4) is stored (see step S717 described later). .

  If the continuous notice counter is not zero (step S713: NO), it is determined that the prefetch notice lottery is prohibited, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

  If the value of the continuous notice counter is zero (step S713: YES), prefetch notice lottery processing is performed assuming that the prefetch notice lottery is permitted (step S714). This pre-reading effect lottery process determines whether to perform the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading variation pattern type specified by the winning command as a result of pre-reading the variation pattern type to be determined at the start of variation. Is. The “winning command” in the present embodiment is a form that includes information relating to each of the look-ahead variation pattern type and the special symbol type. Therefore, the information regarding the prefetch variation pattern type among these pieces of information is used for the lottery opportunity of the prefetch effect lottery. However, when the information regarding the number of pending movement balls, the look-ahead variation pattern type, and the special symbol type is carried in the hold addition command, the control command including the information regarding the look-ahead variation pattern type in the form is received. In addition, a pre-reading effect lottery is performed.

  Here, there are two types of “prefetching notice effects”. One is a one- or multiple-symbol display operation of the on-hold display change system notice effect that occurs when a starting ball is won at the starting port and the starting condition is met (that is, when the winning or starting condition is met) This is a pre-reading notice effect (continuous notice effect) that is executed in the above, and in this embodiment, it is a pre-reading notice effect that is performed by continuing the notice effect of the hold display change system, that is, by shifting the display position. The other is by displaying the change start notice effect that occurs when the symbol variation display operation of the symbol game is executed (that is, at the start of variation) across multiple symbol variation display operations. This is a pre-reading notice effect, and in this embodiment, it is a continuous notice effect that is performed by continuing the notice display effect (appearance of lightning) of the image display change system. Therefore, the lottery for the pre-reading notice effect includes a lottery for determining whether or not to perform a change-based notice effect at the start of fluctuation, and a lottery for determining whether or not to perform a notice-based effect for changing type at the start of change. Do it independently. However, when lottery of both is performed together (a form in which the pre-reading notice effect and the change notice notice effect at the start of change are related to one lottery result) and winning the lottery of the pre-reading notice effect, It may be configured to win a lottery for a notice effect of change system at the start of change.

  In the prefetching effect lottery process, a prefetching notice effect is determined by referring to a prefetching effect lottery table (not shown) based on the prefetching variation pattern type specified by the winning command (step S714), and the result of the prefetching effect lottery Effect information (information related to the prefetch effect lottery result) is set (prefetching advance notice operation status setting process: step S715). This effect information is used when a prefetch notice effect appears. The production information set here includes (i) information for designating the pre-reading notice production of the on-hold display change system, for example, information on the on-hold display (designating the on-hold display mode by the on-hold color and icon image), ii) Information for designating both the notice display effect of the hold display change system of (i) above and the notice effect of the change system of change start at the following (iii), or (iii) Designation of the notice effect of the change system at the start of change Information (for example, type of lightning production (strong lightning production (high expectation of winning), medium lightning production (medium of expectation of winning), weak lightning production (low expectation of winning))), (iv) pre-reading production lottery Non-winning information (information indicating that the pre-reading notice effect of the pending display change system is not executed) is included.

  In the case of this example, when only the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display change system of (i) above is performed, “01H” is set in the pre-read operation status, and both the hold display change system and the change start time change system of (ii) above. If the pre-reading notice status is to be performed, “02H” is set as the pre-reading action status, and if only the pre-reading notice effect of the change start at the above (iii) is performed, “03H” is set as the pre-reading action status. If any of the pre-reading notice effects is not executed, “00H” is stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 243 (step S715).

  When the prefetch effect lottery process is completed, the process proceeds to step S716, and the prefetch determination operation status is determined. If the pre-reading operation status is “00H” (step S716: = 00H), the pre-reading notice effect is not performed, and the process proceeds to step S718 without doing anything.

  On the other hand, when the pre-reading operation status is other than “00H” (step S716: ≠ 00H), the current value of the number of reserved balls (1 to 4 or 1 to 8) is stored in the continuous notice counter (step S717). . As a result, the pre-reading notice lottery for a new operation holding ball is prohibited for a certain period. Note that this counter value is decremented by 1 each time the old action holding ball generated previously is digested in the decorative symbol designation command receiving process of FIG. 20 described later.

  By setting the value of the number of reserved balls existing when winning the pre-reading effect lottery as described above to the “continuous notice counter” (step S717), during the number of symbol fluctuations corresponding to the value of the number of reserved balls, Even if a new winning ball is generated, a lottery for a pre-reading notice effect is prohibited (step S713: NO route). For example, if the current number of reserved balls is three, the lottery of the pre-reading notice effect is prohibited during the three symbol changes corresponding to the number of reserved balls, thereby preventing the occurrence of the pre-reading notice effect. The “continuous notice counter” described above can also be used as information related to the pre-fetch notice winning. In other words, if the “continuous notice counter” is zero, it is determined that the pre-reading notice is not selected (pre-reading notice non-execution state), and if the value is other than zero, it is determined that the pre-reading notice is selected (pre-reading notice execution state). it can.

  When the processing proceeds to step S718, processing for setting a prefetching notice effect scenario having contents including the results of the prefetching notice lottery process, the prefetching notice operation status setting process and the continuous notice counter setting process is performed (step S718).

  When the processing proceeds to step S719, hold addition display processing is performed (step S719). In the hold addition display process, a liquid crystal control command for performing hold display (see FIG. 5) on the liquid crystal display screen is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit side. In this case, a liquid crystal control command for designating information on the number of held balls for operation, a liquid crystal control command for causing a pre-reading notice effect of a holding display change system, and the like are transmitted. As a result, the number of icon images corresponding to the number of the active reserved balls is lit on the liquid crystal display screen, and the reserved display mode (normal reserved color (white) or dedicated reserved color ( Blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern or iridescent color)) is displayed.

<18. Fluctuation pattern designation command reception processing: FIG. 19>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a variation pattern designation command is received. This variation pattern designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S412 of the special symbol variation pattern creation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 19, when the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives the variation pattern designation command, the content of the command is first analyzed (step S <b> 731), the variation pattern information of the special symbol that is the content is obtained, and the RAM 243. In the predetermined area (step S732). The effect scenario during the symbol variation display game is not yet determined at this point, and is determined when the decorative symbol designation command sent following the variation pattern designation command is received. That is, an effect scenario in the symbol variation display game (decoration symbol variation display game) is determined based on the variation pattern information stored here and information (special symbol determination data information) included in the ornament symbol designation command. It has become.

<19. Decoration symbol designation command reception processing: Fig. 20>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing when a decorative symbol designation command is received. This decoration symbol designation command is an effect control command transmitted in step S415 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. Here, based on the variation pattern information obtained by the variation pattern designation command reception process of FIG. 19 and the information obtained by the decoration symbol designation command, effects (various notice effects) and decoration symbols in the symbol variation display game are displayed. Display modes (temporary stop symbols, reach symbols, stop decoration symbols, etc.), a notice effect by a movable object, etc. are determined, and an effect scenario relating to the current variable display game is configured. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 side transmits a hold subtraction command, a variation pattern designation command, and a decoration symbol designation command to the effect control unit 24 in this order (step S404 of the special symbol variation start process in FIG. 12, On the side of the effect control unit 24, when receiving the decoration symbol designation command, the effect control unit 24 performs reception processing of the decoration symbol designation command shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 20, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) first analyzes the contents of the decorative symbol designation command and acquires the contents (step S740).

  Next, a decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process is performed (step S741). In this decorative symbol stop symbol lottery process, the left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol (decoration) to be finally stopped based on the variation pattern information obtained in step S732 and the winning type information included in the decorative symbol designation command The symbol stop symbol combination) is determined by lottery. For example, when the content of the variation pattern is a hit variation pattern designated for reach production and the winning type information is 15R long open probability variable big hit, the stop display mode of the decorative symbol related to the 15R long open probability variable big hit should be determined. First, the left symbol is determined by lottery, then the left symbol and the decorative symbol that can be reached are determined as the right symbol (reach symbol determination), and the left symbol and the right symbol are determined based on the right symbol. , The middle symbol is determined so that the decorative symbol sequence (hit symbol) related to the 15R long open probability variation jackpot is finally stopped. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols when the current decorative symbol variation display game is completed is determined. The determined decorative symbol data is stored and used in the decorative symbol data storage area of the RAM 243.

  Next, a firing guidance information control process is performed (step S742). In this firing guidance information control process, the output start of the right-handed guidance information about when to display the right-handed guidance information and the time until the right-handed guidance information is continued, that is, the game ends with the symbol variation display game. Or an output end process for determining whether to end after continuing over a plurality of symbol variations. In addition, the output of right-handed guidance information about when to switch the display of right-handed guidance information to the display of right-handed guidance information and how long to continue the left-handed guidance information, that is, in the symbol variation display game An output end process is performed as to whether to end or to end after continuing a plurality of symbol variations. Although details will be described later, the switching from the display of the right-handed guidance information to the display of the right-handed guidance information is performed in the first embodiment under a situation where the probability variation state in which the right-handed guidance information is displayed continues. In the case of winning the falling lottery. However, in other embodiments 1 to 5 and the like, the transition from the electric support state to the no electric support state is processed assuming that the condition for switching from right-handed to left-handed is satisfied.

(19-1. Treasure chest production: S743 to S745)
Next, the process proceeds to step S743, and it is determined whether or not the electric support state has ended, and in the first embodiment, whether or not the probability change state has ended (step S743). When the probability change state falls to the normal state and switches to the state without electric support (step S743: YES), a treasure box effect (real treasure box effect) directly related to the presence or absence of electric support is maintained for a predetermined period, for example, Settings are made to occur over a plurality of variation display periods including the fallen variation display game period or the fallen variation display game period (step S744). As a result, the liquid crystal display screen is switched from FIG. 51A to FIG. 51B, and the treasure box effect screen is displayed with a predetermined number of executions of the one variable display game to the plurality of variable display games. Become. If the power support state continues (step S743: NO), it is determined by lottery whether or not to display a treasure chest effect (gase treasure chest effect) that is not directly related to the presence or absence of the power support. . Details of the treasure chest effect in each embodiment will be described later.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S746, and it is determined whether or not the treasure box effect set in step S744 or S745 is being executed (treasure box effect period) (step S746). If it is during the treasure box production period (step S746: YES), in order to suppress the other productions and make the treasure chest production appear preferentially, the continuous notice production process and the notice production lottery process are bypassed, and the process goes to step S749. move on. If it is not during the treasure box effect period (step S746: NO), the process proceeds to step S747 to perform the continuous notice effect process and the notice effect lottery process.

(19-2. Continuous notice effect processing: S747)
In step S747, first, it is determined whether or not the prefetching operation status set in step S715 of FIG. 18 is “00H: No prefetching notice effect is executed”. Here, when the pre-reading operation status is not “00H: No pre-reading notice effect is executed”, that is, “01H: Only the pre-reading notice is held”, “02H: Both the pre-reading notice and the background (lightning) pre-reading notice are executed”, “ This continuous notice effect processing (step S747) is performed on the condition that it is one of the following: “03H: Run only background (lightning) prefetch notice”.

  The continuous notice effect process performed in step S747 is an effect process for causing the “variation start change system” continuous notice effect to appear in the current symbol change display game. Here, when the pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” is won in the pre-reading effect lottery process in step S714 (FIG. 18) (pre-reading operation status is “02H” or “003”), a dedicated notice image ( Lightning effect production data by display of lightning (simulating lightning) is created and stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Thereby, the lightning effect by the lightning image display appears on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (see FIG. 6B).

  The “continuous notice counter” continuous notice effect is executed until the “continuous notice counter” counter reaches zero, and the value of this “continuous notice counter” is decremented by 1 every time the symbol variation display game is performed. Is done. For example, when the pre-reading notice lottery winning hold is the third hold, the counter value of the continuous notice counter is set with the number of held balls N = 3, and “N = 3”. The continuous notice will be performed until all the three reserved memories are consumed.

  In addition, the continuous notice effect processing is performed unless another successive addition command or winning command is received unless the next notice counter is zero and the pre-reading operation status is “02H”. Absent. In other words, unless the action holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is digested, the pre-reading notice effect for the new action holding ball is not generated, and the generation of the duplicate pre-reading notice effect is prohibited. . Thereby, the occurrence of overlap between the pre-reading notices by the previous operation holding ball is limited, and the player can grasp which operation holding ball is the pre-reading notice.

(19-3. Notice effect lottery processing: S748)
In the notice effect lottery process in step S748, one notice is selected from a plurality of notice effects based on the notice lottery table (not shown) specified in the notice effect lottery table designation table (not shown) and the contents of the variation pattern. Choose a production by lottery.

  This notice effect lottery process also includes a transition process of the effect mode that informs you of the fact that there is a transition (falling) from the certain change state (electric support state) to the normal state (no electric support state) It is. As for the production mode that informs of this fall, the establishment of a mode transition opportunity for transitioning from one production mode to another production mode is achieved when a jackpot end command is received, a specific SP fluctuation pattern is received, or a non-specific SP For example, when the transition pattern lottery is won when the variation pattern is received, the loss variation count is 30th, and the power support end is received. Details of this will be described later.

(19-4. Production information setting process)
When the notice effect lottery process in step S748 is completed, an effect information setting process is then performed (step S749). In this effect information setting process, the suppression counter is cleared, and the effect information related to the notice effect determined through steps S743 to S748 is set. Here, effect information (for example, information that can specify the type of the determined notice effect) that is necessary when an effect scenario is constructed in the effect scenario setting process in step S750 described later is set.

(19-5. Production scenario setting process)
Next, effect scenario setting processing is performed (step S750).

  In the effect scenario setting process of step S750, based on the effect information, an effect scenario of the effect to be displayed in the current decorative symbol variation display game is constructed. For each notice effect, the start timing during the symbol variation display game and the period (effect time width) in which the effect appears are determined in advance, and the notice effect determined through steps S743 to S748 and the current change This decorative symbol variation display game based on the contents of the pattern (variation time, presence / absence of reach production, type if there is reach production, presence / absence of pseudo-ream, number of pseudo-reams if there is pseudo-ream, etc.) Production scenarios for various performances to be developed are built. The effect scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243.

  When the effect scenario setting process of step S750 is completed, the decoration symbol designation command receiving process is exited, and thereafter, the decoration symbol variation display game based on the effect scenario is started.

<20. Launch Guidance Information Control Processing: FIGS. 21 to 23>
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the firing guidance information control process related to the firing guidance notification effect. In this firing guidance information control process (FIG. 21), the start time of the firing guidance information effect has arrived. Specifically, the game state command (a specific effect including game information necessary for the appearance of the firing guidance notification effect) It is determined whether or not a control command has been received. If a gaming state command has been received (step S761: YES), the firing guidance information output start process shown in FIG. 21 is executed (step S762). Examples of the “gaming state command” include, for example, a variation pattern designation command, a gaming state designation command, a predetermined command transmitted during a hit (such as a big hit (small hit) start command, a big hit (small hit) end command), the remaining There are electric support number of times command, short-time end command, fall command, right-handed command, left-handed command, etc. What command is used to show the firing guidance notification effect according to the current gaming state Whether to implement the launch guidance notification effect can be determined as appropriate according to the type of gaming machine.

(20-1. Launch guidance information output start processing: FIG. 22)
In this firing guidance information output start process (FIG. 22), it is determined based on the received game state command whether or not the firing trigger notification start trigger has arrived (step S771).

  If the received game state command is, for example, a big hit start command, the right hit guidance information “→” (arrow) is included as shown in FIG. Output of firing guidance information (right-handed notification) including display of the guidance notification image 373, a voice “right-handed” message, direction indication by a light arrow, etc. is started, and the firing guidance information output flag is turned ON. (Step S772). This is because during the winning game, the winning prize port 50 on the right flow path 3c is opened, and it is advantageous for the player to “right-turn” aiming at the right flow path 3c side. . Note that even if you win the big hit lottery with the electric support, and the right game will not change even if the winning game starts, the right will not change. You may control not to newly start (update) notification of striking guidance information.

  In addition, the received game status command includes a power support start information that can specify the start of a power support enabled state (for example, a big hit end command, a right-handed instruction command related to a big hit with a power support (probable big hit or short time big hit) Etc.), the right-hand notification is started and the firing guidance information output flag is switched ON (step S772). When a command is sent that includes information on the start of an electric support that can specify the start of an electric support state, the gaming state is shifted to an electric support state (probability change state or time-short state), and the player It is advantageous for the self to perform “right-handed” aiming at the downflow path 3c side. When the current symbol variation display game has a specific variation pattern (for example, SP reach variation pattern), a notice effect image that prevents the effect of the notice effect when the guidance notification image 373 is superimposed on the display screen may occur. There is sex. Therefore, when the variation pattern is a specific pattern or during a specific notice effect, the firing guidance notification effect may be suppressed (prohibited or interrupted). As a result, the display of the symbol variation and the notice effect according to the reach variation pattern is prioritized, and the display of the right-handed or left-handed guidance information can be suppressed (prohibited or interrupted).

  In addition, the received gaming state command includes a command (for example, a fall command (sent in step S425 in FIG. 13) including a power support start information that can specify the start of the power support-free state, If it is an instruction command or the like, output of left-handed guidance information is started (step S779). When a command is sent that includes information on the start of no power support that can identify the start of the power support state, the gaming state will be shifted to the state without power support (latency or normal gaming state) The possibility of winning the lower start port 35 on the path 3c is extremely low. For this reason, it is advantageous for the player to perform “left-handed” aiming at the upper start opening 34 in the absence of electric support. In the case of the first embodiment, when a fall command (transmitted in step S425 in FIG. 13) is received, the left-handed notification guidance information is immediately switched to the time-short state from the beginning of the fall of the symbol change. Is started (left-handed notification). However, when the power support guarantee count is attached as in Embodiments 2 to 3, when the power support guarantee count has reached the last time the symbol change has occurred, the power support status shifts to the power support disabled status. Starts the output of left-handed guidance information at the timing when the end of the symbol variation (or immediately after the end: for example, the definite display time elapses) has been received. This is because, when there is no reserved storage, the next symbol variation of the last power support guarantee number of times may be started without guidance notification.

(20-2. Fire guidance information output end processing: FIG. 23)
Returning to the firing guidance information control process of FIG. 21, when it is determined in step S763 of the process that the firing guidance information output flag is ON (step S763: YES), the firing guidance information output shown in FIG. An end process is executed (step S764).

  In the firing guidance information output end process of FIG. 23, it is first determined whether or not the predetermined output end time of the firing guidance information (end time of the firing guidance notification effect) has arrived (step S781). When a right-handed notification is being made, for example, a predetermined game period (for example, symbol variation 1 from the time when the electric support state (probability change state or short time state) ends or the transition from the electric support state to the no electric support state occurs. ˜2 rotations) or when a predetermined time elapses, or when the regular round game related to the normal jackpot ends (when the jackpot game ends), it is determined that the output end time of the firing guidance information has arrived. In the case of left-handed notification, a predetermined game period (for example, from the time when the big hit game is started, when the state without the electric support is changed to the state with the electric support, or when the state without the electric support is changed to the state with the electric support) (for example, It is determined that the output end time of the firing guidance information has arrived, for example, at a time when a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation is 1 to 2 rotations. However, the output end time of the firing guidance information can be arbitrarily set. For example, the guidance is performed from the time when the firing position advantageous to the player changes or the time when the output starts to the time when a predetermined game period or time elapses. The notification may be continued.

  When it is determined that the output end time of the firing guidance information has arrived (step S781: YES), the firing guidance information output flag is switched to OFF (step S782), and the firing guidance information output end process is terminated (step S783). ). As a result, the firing guide information image 373 is not displayed on the display screen 360 of the liquid crystal display device 36. Therefore, even if the firing guidance information notification is interrupted or stopped halfway, the firing guidance information output flag continues during the period until the firing guidance information output flag is switched to OFF.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined output end time of the firing guide information has not arrived (step S781: NO), the launch guide information output end processing is ended without doing anything.

<21. Specific Example 1 of Embodiment 1: FIGS. 26 to 27>
FIGS. 26 to 27 show the guidance information of the launch direction in the “immediate fall type” gaming machine according to the first embodiment (section a in FIG. 24), as a result, the gaming state falls from the probabilistic state to the normal state. This is a specific example (specific example 1 of the first embodiment) in which the display is switched from “right-handed” to “left-handed” and a treasure box effect appears at that time.

(21-1. Real treasure box production: t6 in FIG. 26, FIG. 27)
Referring to FIG. 26, in specific example 1 in this section a, 15R jackpot game is started by winning the 15R probability variable jackpot at time t1, and electric support is provided from time t2 when the 15R jackpot game ends. The symbol fluctuation display operation is started in the bottom (probability change state: high probability state, power support state). During the big hit game and the probability variation state, the guidance information image 373 indicating the launch direction of the game ball is displayed in the “display mode indicating the right strike direction” by the launch guidance information display control of the effect control unit, and the right strike is performed. It is clearly shown to the player that it is advantageous. As a “display mode indicating the right-handed direction” of the guidance notification image 373, in the first specific example, a plurality of right-pointing arrow images 374a shown in FIG. The “dynamic display mode” that sequentially moves is used, and the right-pointing arrow image 374a is displayed in the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen in the dynamic display mode of “moving right arrow and right”. A broken line arrow 375 is added in the drawing to indicate that the “moving direction” of the arrow image 374a is the right direction, and does not indicate an arrow image displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

  While the right-pointing arrow image 374a is displayed in the liquid crystal screen in the dynamic display mode, the probability variation state (high probability, with electric support) continues. Thereafter, at time t6 in FIG. 26, the winning lottery is won (falling down prize), and the state is changed from the probability change state to the normal state (low probability, no electric support), and from the “electric support state” to the “electric support state”. Migrate to Since the gaming machine handled here has a configuration in which “left-handed” is advantageous to the player when there is no electric support, the guidance notification of the launching direction is “right-handed” according to the rules regarding gaming machines. "Will have to be changed from" left-handed ".

  Therefore, on the liquid crystal screen, the launch direction indicated by the guide notification image 373 in the launch direction from the time when the symbol variation display operation is started based on winning the fall lottery (falling prize) is shown in FIG. To (b). In this example, the direction of the arrow image is switched from right to left. That is, a dynamic display mode in which a plurality of left-pointing arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move in the right direction at a constant speed or intermittently. In this case, the point to be noted is that the direction indicated by the arrow image 374 is merely switched from right to left, and the direction in which the plurality of left-pointing arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and are sequentially moved at a constant speed or intermittently is still “ It is “right” and does not change. A right-pointing arrow image 374a is displayed in the upper right corner of the liquid crystal screen in the dynamic display mode of “move left arrow and right”.

  On the other hand, from the time when the symbol variation display operation is started based on winning the falling lottery (falling down prize), as shown in the section from time t6 to t7 in FIG. “Treasure box production” is a suspicious production that makes you feel that there is a possibility of a transition to a no-electric support state (in the example of FIG. 26, there is a possibility of a probable fall); Occur. If the frame effect button 13 corresponding to the push button image 372 shown in FIG. 25 (b) is continuously hit and the treasure box image 371 in the screen is opened, the electric support presence state (probability change state in the example of FIG. 26) continues.

  FIG. 27 shows the relationship between symbol variation (symbol variation display operation), firing guidance information notification, and notice effect based on the time transition centered at time t6 in FIG. The symbol variation before the drop-in prize is “N-0”, the symbol variation after the drop-in prize is “N + 1”, and the subsequent symbol variation is “N + 2”, “N + 3”, etc. Here, each symbol variation is It is assumed that the shortest variation pattern (for example, a normal variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second) is the one among all variation patterns.

  As shown in the “symbol variation” column, in FIG. 27, a command of a normal variation pattern (treasure box effect failure) is transmitted at time t6. The period of symbol variation N + 1 starting from this time t6 is a period in which the symbol variation display game of one unit continues. In the case of the instant fall type of the first embodiment, the normal state has already been reached simultaneously with the start of this symbol variation display game. Has fallen to. Also, as shown in the column “launch guidance information notification” in FIG. 27, at time t6, the guidance notification image 373 switches from the dynamic display mode of “right arrow right shift” to the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right shift”. However, in the case of the first embodiment, this timing coincides with the start of the symbol variation display game won in the falling lottery because the internal gaming state immediately falls into the normal gaming state by winning the falling lottery. Therefore, in the case of the specific example 1 in the first embodiment (section a in FIG. 24), on the one hand, simultaneously with the start of the symbol variation N + 1, the firing guidance information switches from “right arrow right move” to “left arrow right move”. On the other hand, as can be seen from the relationship between “symbol variation” and “notice effect” in FIG. 27, at time t6, a normal variation pattern (for example, a variation time of 2 seconds) is transmitted with respect to symbol variation N + 1, and a notice is given accordingly. A treasure box effect appears as an effect (skeptical effect), and this treasure box effect continues over a period of symbol variation N + 1 to N + 2.

  Therefore, from the beginning of the game period in the symbol variation display game that has fallen to the state without electricity support, the guidance notification image 373 of the dynamic display mode of “move left arrow to right” in FIG. At the same time, the “treasure box effect” of FIG. 25B occurs, and the player repeatedly hits the frame effect button 13 as a push button corresponding to the push button image 372. Therefore, the player's attention is focused on whether or not the push button is repeatedly hit and whether or not the treasure box in the screen is opened (attention-reducing effect works). In addition, the guidance notification image 373 displayed at that time is a dynamic display mode of “move left arrow” in FIG. 25B, and the left arrow image is “ It moves in the same direction as in the dynamic display mode of “Right arrow right move”. As a result of the synergistic action of the two, it is predicted that the time when the player recognizes that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification will shift after the middle of the N + 1 variation game period. Is done. In other words, until the game result of “treasure box production” comes out, that is, until the conclusion of whether or not the treasure box is released, the player keeps hitting the push button repeatedly, and often observes the treasure box production. As a result, the player can fully enjoy the fun of treasure chest production. Therefore, it is too early for the player to recognize that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched from right-handed notification to left-handed notification, and the player has stopped and the operating rate of the gaming machine has decreased. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the significance of providing a treasure chest effect is lost.

(21-2. Gasse's treasure box production: t4 in FIG. 26)
In FIG. 26, a change pattern designation command related to a specific reach change pattern (a change pattern specification command related to the appearance of a successful treasure chest effect) is transmitted at time t4 during the probability change state before the drop-in winning, and the probability change fall. Gase's treasure chest effect (a treasure chest effect that informs the continuation of the probable change state) may be generated. In this treasure box production, a screen for opening the treasure box appears in the middle or at the end of the reach production period, and the notification result of the treasure box production is “Treasure box production success: continued electric support”. Except for this point, the rest is the same as the unsuccessful treasure chest effect described at time t6 in FIG. This treasure chest production (success treasure chest production) exists in addition to the real treasure chest production (failure treasure chest production), so that the real treasure chest production (failure treasure chest production) is the Gase treasure chest production (success treasure chest production) It becomes difficult to distinguish from the (production), and the tension to the treasure box production increases, and the interest in the game increases. In addition, by causing the real treasure chest effect and the gash treasure chest effect to appear at an appropriate frequency, the player has more opportunities to focus on the treasure chest effect, and the player recognizes that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched. The time can be delayed.

<22. Specific Example 2A of Embodiment 2: FIGS. 28 to 29>
FIG. 29 shows a treasure box effect as a skeptical effect that doubts the continuation of the electric support state in the case of category “b” in the “probable fall type 1” gaming machine in which there is no electric support after 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee. This is a specific example of the case (specific example 2A in category b).

(22-1. Launch Direction Guidance Notification and Treasure Box Production: te in FIG. 29)
In the specific example 2A of the second embodiment, the drop-in prize is awarded at time t6 within 100 times of the electric support guarantee, and the state shifts from the certain change state to the short-time state. The support state continues until the symbol change at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee. However, in the symbol change at the 101st rotation, there is no power support state, and left-handed is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, in FIG. 29, the guidance notification image 373 is switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification at or immediately before the time te when the symbol variation at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee is completed.

  However, the switching of the guidance notification image 373 is merely switched from the right arrow image 374a of “Right arrow right move” to the left arrow image 374b of “Left arrow right move”. That is, the only difference between the arrow image 374a and the arrow image 374b is that the direction of the arrow image is switched from right to left, and the direction of movement of the entire guidance notification image 373 is changed before and after switching. Absent.

  Simultaneously with the switching of the guidance notification image 373, the treasure chest image 371 shown in FIG. 25B appears on the liquid crystal screen, and the player participation type treasure chest effect is started. A push button will be hit repeatedly to open the treasure chest, and attention will be directed to it. As a result, it is delayed to notice that the guidance notification image 373 has changed from right-handed notification to left-handed notification, and the time when the player stops launching is not from the beginning of the symbol variation, but of the symbol variation. It slips to the end or the end. Therefore, it is possible to have the player enjoy the treasure chest production.

(22-2. Gase's treasure box production: t4 in FIG. 29)
In FIG. 29, the command of the SP reach variation pattern (successful treasure box production) is transmitted at time t4 during the probability change state before the drop-in winning prize, and there is a relationship with falling into the treasure box effect of the frustration, that is, the electric support no state. There will be a production with no power (always with electric support). Therefore, the occurrence of this treasure chest effect can be distinguished from the real treasure chest effect (unsuccessful treasure chest effect) or the true treasure chest effect (successful treasure chest effect) as in the case of FIG. It becomes difficult, tension for treasure chest production increases, and interest in games increases.

  In the second embodiment, when the electric support guarantee count is over and the electric support is absent, the left-hand guidance notification is switched. Alternatively, the skeptical effect associated with the left-handed guidance notification may appear over one or a plurality of symbol variations from the symbol variation, or over a plurality of symbol variations before and after the symbol variation. . However, in the case of the second embodiment, since the end timing of the electric support state is fixed (electric support guarantee 100 times), in the symbol variation in which there is no electric support state, or one or more symbols from the symbol variation. If a skeptical effect is only shown over fluctuations, or over several fluctuations before and after that fluctuation, it simply notifies the end of the power support state. End up. Therefore, the treasure box effect according to the second embodiment does not notify whether or not the electric support state is continued as in the first embodiment and the like. It is preferable to use it as a notice effect (expectation effect) that indicates the expected degree of winning. Specifically, in a state where there is a power support, as a treasure chest effect having a character different from that of Embodiment 1, in the case of a specific loss variation pattern (for example, SP reach variation pattern), “Treasure box production: lost” ”is displayed, and in the case of a hit variation pattern,“ real treasure box production (successful treasure box production: big hit) ”is displayed. In this way, if a real treasure box effect and a gasse treasure box effect are mixed and appear at an appropriate frequency, the game will be displayed rather than simply displaying the treasure box effect by changing the pattern around the ST specified number of times. The player has more opportunities to pay attention to the treasure box effect that suggests the expectation of winning, and the player can delay the time it is recognized that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched. be able to.

<23. Specific Example 2B of Embodiment 2: FIG. 30>
FIG. 30 shows a treasure box effect as a skeptical effect that doubts the continuation of the electric support state in the case of category c in the “probable fall type 1” gaming machine in which there is no electric support after 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee. It is a specific example (specific example 2B in category c) taking the case as an example.

(23-1 Launch direction guidance notification and treasure box production: te in FIG. 30)
In the specific example 2B of the second embodiment, the electric support guarantee 100th rotation arrives at the time te without winning the falling lottery within 100 rotations of the electric support guarantee 100 in the probability changing state, and the latent probability change from the 101st rotation next. Right-handed is disadvantageous for the player, because there is no electric support in the state. Therefore, in FIG. 30, the guidance notification image 373 is switched from the right-handed notification to the left-handed notification at the time te when the symbol variation at the 100th rotation of the electric support guarantee is completed.

  That is, the image is switched from the right arrow image 374a of “right arrow move right” to the left arrow image 374b of “left arrow move right”. The only difference between the arrow image 374a and the arrow image 374b is that the direction of the arrow image is switched from the right direction to the left direction, and the moving direction is not changed before and after the switching.

  Simultaneously with the switching of the guidance notification image 373, a treasure box image 371 shown in FIG. 25B appears on the liquid crystal screen, and a player-participation-type treasure box effect is started, and the player opens the treasure box. Therefore, the push button is repeatedly hit, and attention is directed to it. As a result, it is delayed to notice that the guidance notification image 373 has changed from right-handed notification to left-handed notification, and the time when the player stops launching is not from the beginning of the symbol variation, but of the symbol variation. It slips to the end or the end. Therefore, it is possible to have the player enjoy the treasure chest production.

(23-2. Gase's treasure box production: t4 in FIG. 30)
In FIG. 30, the SP reach variation pattern (successful treasure box production) command at the time of losing is transmitted at the time t4 during the latent probability changing state before the drop-in and the “Gase treasure box production”, that is, no electric support state. An effect unrelated to falling occurs. The treasure box production here works as a suspicious production (skeptical production) that has not yet fallen from the high probability state and is in the latent state, and the “Gase treasure box production (successful treasure box production)” Announcing the fact that it is in a certain state, or notifying that the possibility is high, "real treasure box production (treasure box production failure") definitely informs that it is not in a latent state, The treasure chest effect here is to determine which treasure chest effect is to be displayed (determined by lottery) according to the current effect mode and gaming state. Therefore, if this treasure box effect can occur, it can be notified whether or not it is still in a high probability state, or can be given to the player an inference element as to whether or not it is in a high probability state. , Tension to treasure chest production Increases, so that the interest is growing for the game.

<24. Section length in which treasure chest effect appears in Embodiment 2: FIG. 31>
In the second embodiment, in the case of the specific example 2A in which the electric support guarantee is made within 100 rotations (winning the falling lottery), the state with the electric support is completed at the time te when the electric support guarantee 100 rotations have elapsed, and the normal state is reached. Then, the next symbol variation display game is executed in the absence of electric support. Also, in the case of specific example 2B in which the electric support guarantee was not made within 100 rotations, the state with the electric support ends at the time te when the electric support guarantee 100 rotations has elapsed, and the state changes to the normal state. The display game is executed in a state without electric support. At this time, the guidance notification image 373 is switched from the dynamic display mode of “move right arrow” to the dynamic display mode of “move left arrow”. That is, in the second embodiment, the time point te at which the left-hand guidance notification is switched is known in advance. Therefore, in the second embodiment, a treasure box effect is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation operations before and after the symbol variation including the symbol variation in which switching to the left-handed guidance notification occurs. This left-handed guidance notification is continued until the first rotation when the symbol variation display time is long, and until the second rotation (up to the second rotation in FIG. 31) when the symbol variation display time is short. To do.

  FIG. 31 illustrates a section length in which the treasure chest effect appears in the second embodiment. In the first embodiment, the symbol change operation is continued for about 2 to 3 rotations after the switching time point te in which the guidance notification image 373 becomes a dynamic display mode from “right move to right” to “left move to right”. However, in the case of the second embodiment (FIG. 31), a treasure box effect is started from a point that goes back a plurality of times from the switching time te by using the fact that the switching time te is known in advance. This is different from the first embodiment (FIGS. 26 to 27).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 31, a treasure box effect is obtained from a symbol change operation (time tx at the 97th rotation) four times before this time te, centering on a known time te at which the end of 100 times of the electric support guarantee is reached. After that, by generating a treasure box effect for each symbol variation display operation until the time te when the electric support is guaranteed 100 times (from the 97th rotation to the 100th rotation), the player changes the boundary of the symbol variation. Continue to make a treasure box production that continues multiple times without being conscious of it. During this period, as shown in FIG. 28A, the guidance notification image 373 is displayed in a dynamic display mode of “move right arrow”. Then, from time te, the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the dynamic display mode of “move left arrow right”. Thereafter, a treasure box effect is continuously generated with symbol variations of a total of 6 rotations (97th rotation to 102nd rotation) until the second rotation (102th time) at time ty. The treasure box effect that continues from the time tx to ty (the 97th to 102nd rotations) on the number of fluctuations is a continuous effect that does not make the player conscious of being divided into multiple times, that is, a continuous effect. Make it appear.

  In this way, the treasure box effect that repeatedly strikes the effect push button is displayed from before the fourth rotation (the 97th point) to after the second rotation (the 102nd point) centering on the end point te of the electric support guarantee number of 100 times. The reason is that, in consideration of the fact that the variation pattern selected during the probability variation operation or the short-time operation is a normal variation pattern with a short time width of about 1 to 2 seconds, the guidance notification image 373 is left-handed. This is to prevent the player from being aware of the point of time when switching to notification.

  In specific examples 2A and 2B of the second embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 31, a treasure box in which a push button is repeatedly hit within a total of 6 rotations of symbol variation from the 97th rotation to the 102nd symbol variation display operation. During the period in which the effect appears and the treasure box effect continues, the guidance notification image 373 moves from the dynamic display mode of “right move to right” (FIG. 28 (a)) to “moving from left move to right”. The time point when the display is switched to the target display mode (FIG. 28B) is created, thereby producing a distraction effect and the player is not aware when the guidance notification image 373 is switched to the left-handed guidance notification. I am doing so. Further, the treasure box effect is continued over a period until the second symbol change after the time te when the guidance notification image 373 switches to the left-handed guidance notification.

  The reason for this is to create a situation where the treasure box effect continues even when the left-hand guidance notification is switched, that is, after the 101st rotation symbol variation display game is over. The reason for this is that in the case of a fall type or ST type game machine, considering that the digestion time required for one symbol variation game is as short as about 1 to 2 seconds, the symbol variation at the 101st rotation when there is no electric support. In contrast to ending the treasure chest effect at the time, the direction in which the treasure chest effect is continued over the period up to the second symbol change after time te is the guidance notification image in the dynamic display mode of “move left arrow right” This is because the player can be unaware of the point in time when 373 switches.

<25. Relationship between Treasure Box Production and Reservation Memory in Embodiment 2: FIG. 32>
FIG. 32 shows another case in which the time point for switching to the left-handed guidance notification is known in advance. When there are a plurality of reserved memories, and there is a reserved memory in which the electric support presence state ends, the reserved memory is being stored. This shows an example in which a treasure box effect is made to appear by executing one or several symbol change operations until the reserved memory that ends the power support state is used for symbol change. This example is applicable not only to the specific examples 2A and 2B of the second embodiment but also to the specific example 3B of the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the specific examples 2A, 2B, and 3B, the game ball is high on the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 while the guaranteed number of electric support is 100 times. Picking up frequently, winnings to the lower start opening 35 frequently occur, and there is a situation where the reserved memory is accumulated from 3 to the maximum maximum reserved memory number 4. FIG. 32 (a) shows that “hold 1” of the hold memory corresponding to the 96th rotation out of 100 times of the electric support guarantee is provided to the symbol variation display game, and a new hold memory is being used as the hold memory during digestion. "Hold 4" occurs, and "Hold 4" is a hold memory corresponding to the 100th rotation of the electronic chew support guarantee. At this time, on the liquid crystal screen, at the upper right corner of the in-game screen, a plurality of guidance notification images 373 with right-pointing arrow images 374a are arranged in a straight line at a constant speed or intermittently in the right direction (the direction along the dashed arrow 375). Are displayed in a dynamic display mode of “moving right arrow to right” sequentially, informing the player that right-handed is advantageous.

  When the reserved memory at the 96th rotation is consumed, the entire reserved memory from “HOLD 1” to “HOLD 4” is shifted as shown in FIG. 32B, and the “HOLD 1” corresponding to the 97th rotation is shifted. The reserved memory is provided for the symbol variation display game. At this time, a treasure box effect appears on the liquid crystal screen as a skeptical effect that doubts the continuation of the electric support state. If the frame effect button 13 corresponding to the push button image 372 shown in FIG. 32 (b) is continuously hit to open the treasure box image 371 in the screen, the electric support state is continued. At this time, the guidance notification image 373 continues to be displayed in the dynamic display mode of “move right arrow”, and continues the right-hand notification.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (c), the time te, which is the end of the power support guarantee count 100, arrives, and the reserved storage of “hold 4” is provided to the symbol variation display game. However, the treasure chest effect is still continued, and the guidance notification image 373 also continues the right-hand notification with the dynamic display mode of “move right arrow”.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (d), the hold storage of “hold 5” is provided to the symbol change display game, and the symbol change at the 101st rotation is started. Simultaneously with the start of the symbol change at the 101st rotation, the guidance notification image 373 has a plurality of right-pointing arrow images 374a arranged in a straight line and sequentially moving to the right at a constant speed or intermittently. Is switched to the dynamic display mode of “left arrow right movement” in which a plurality of left-pointing arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move in the right direction at a constant speed or intermittently.

  However, both the right-pointing arrow image 374a in FIG. 32C and the left-pointing arrow image 374b in FIG. 32D have the opposite directions, and the movement direction is the same direction indicated by the dashed arrow 375. The change from the guidance notification to the left-hand guidance notification is not so noticeable on the screen, and the change is difficult to recognize. In addition to this, the treasure box effect continues to appear even in the symbol change at the 101st rotation, and the player is prompted to hit the frame effect button 13 repeatedly. Therefore, the player is more conscious of participating in this treasure box production and hitting it repeatedly. As a result, it is considered that it is likely to continue launching (right strike) as it is without recognizing the switch to left strike guidance notification and stopping launch.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (e), the hold storage of “hold 6” is provided to the symbol change display game, and the symbol change at the 102nd rotation is started. The guidance notification image 373 has already been switched to the dynamic display mode of “move left arrow right”, but the treasure box effect continues to appear even in the 102th rotation of the symbol change, and the frame effect button 13 is repeatedly hit by the player. You are prompted to do it. Therefore, in many cases, the player will participate in the treasure chest effect in the symbol change at the 102nd rotation. As a result, until “hold 1” to “hold 6” are consumed, the player switches to the left-handed guidance notification and does not stop the launch, and participates in the treasure box production and launches (right Will be continued). Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain the player's tension state and enjoy the treasure chest effect to the end over a plurality of continuous symbol variations of the 97th rotation to the 102nd rotation.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 32 (f), the hold storage of “hold 7” is provided to the symbol change display game, and the symbol change at the 103rd rotation is started. At this point, the liquid crystal screen returns to the normal production. Note that although the left notification of the guidance notification image 373 is still continued, it does not appear after a predetermined number of fluctuations.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment (FIGS. 28 to 31), as a case where the time point for switching to the left-handed guidance notification is known in advance, the focus is placed on the 100th electric support guarantee guarantee, but the existing stored memory currently exists as a known value. You can also focus on the number. If there are multiple hold memories, this can be grasped from the hold addition command. Therefore, when a plurality of new hold memories are generated, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a treasure box effect is to be generated. A treasure box effect can also be generated over symbol variations corresponding to the number of reserved memories, provided that the reserved memory is a winning lottery for generating a treasure box effect. In this case, it is only necessary to consider that the new hold memory won in the lottery corresponds to the hold 4 in FIG. 32 (the 100th rotation at the end of the electric support), and the processing operation is equivalent to the operation of the hold 4. .

<26. Transition to the production mode informing the fall of it: FIGS. 33 to 35>
With reference to FIG. 29 to FIG. 32, a description will be given of the production mode transition for notifying the fall that is performed in the specific examples 2A and 2B.

  When the fall information indicating that the gaming state has fallen to a low probability state is transmitted from the main control unit 20 by a winning command or a pending addition command, based on this fall information, "implicit information related to fall" It is set as the structure notified in production mode. However, what is notified to the player as the implied information related to the fall is not a character that clearly conveys the fall, but a character that informs the possibility of the fall without fail. In this specification, a stimulus given to a player without regard to whether the current gaming state is in a high probability state, or has fallen to or is about to fall is referred to as “implicit information”. Therefore, the implied information includes falling implied information for informing that it has fallen, and non-falling implied information for informing that it has not fallen.

  Specifically, the means for assigning the implied information is based on the presence or absence of a fall, that is, whether the current gaming state is in a high probability state, whether it has fallen to a low probability state or is about to fall. This is realized by weighting the type of certain effect mode (morning, noon, evening, night, night + rain of the background effect 361) in association with the game state at the start of the change when the symbol change display operation starts. Yes. That is, the appearance tendency of the effect mode that is easy to shift when falling, in other words, the effect mode that is difficult to shift when not falling, is changed depending on the gaming state at the start of the change.

  FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 show which one of the plurality of types of effect modes A to E prepared in advance as having different high probability expectations about whether or not the gaming state exists in the high probability state. FIG. 33 shows whether to shift, and FIGS. 33 and 34 together form a transfer destination mode distribution table. Here, “mode” is an abbreviation for production mode.

  This transition destination mode distribution table indicates which of a plurality of types of effect modes A to E prepared in advance with different high probabilities of gaming state when a mode transition opportunity is established. The transition destination is related to whether or not the gaming state at the start of the variation when the symbol variation display operation starts is a high probability state, and whether or not there is a holding memory related to the falling-on-hold winning decision. By weighting so that the selection ratios of the previous production modes A to E are different, when the gaming state is in a low probability state or there is a holding memory related to the falling within-holding winning combination, the above selection ratio is used. Thus, it is set so that a production mode that is easy to shift to is selected from the production modes A to E.

  Of the tables constituting this transfer destination mode distribution table, the table in FIG. 33 is a combination of four factors (probability level, presence / absence of electric support, presence / absence of fall within hold, presence / absence of continuous chain within hold). The game situation classifications (hereinafter simply referred to as state classifications) determined by, and one of a plurality of types of mode selection tables Ta to Td prepared for each state classification, and the state classification and mode selection tables Ta to Td. Is a table (hereinafter simply referred to as a “state category association table”).

  In addition, the table of FIG. 34 defines the selection ratios (distribution ratios) of the production modes A to E selected as the transition destinations by the mode selection tables Ta to Td assigned to the state classifications in the state classification association table of FIG. (Hereinafter referred to as “effect mode transition lottery table”).

  FIG. 35 shows specific examples of the effect modes A to E. The effect modes A, B, C, D, and E are respectively the morning background effect, the day background effect, the evening background effect, the night background effect, and the night. + It is a rain background production. Among these effect modes A to E, effect modes A, B, C, and D are determined so that the high probability expectation increases in this order. The effect mode D of the night background with the highest expectation is the jackpot determination mode. The night + rain background effect mode E is an effect mode in which a big hit can be expected in the presence of electric support, and for example, an effect called a chance time effect appears. Here, the electric support state means a state (high base state) in which a period for opening the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 and an open extension function for extending the number of times of opening are provided.

(Mode change opportunity)
These effect modes A to E are transferred to any one of them through the state category association table (FIG. 33) and the effect mode transfer lottery table (FIG. 34) on condition that the mode change trigger is established. The mode transition triggers to the effect modes A to E include (i) the end of a predetermined profit state such as the end of the big hit game or the end of the short-time state, and (ii) reception of a specific effect control command such as an SP reach variation pattern. (Iii) Winning the mode transition selection lottery, (iV) The number of lost fluctuations has reached a predetermined number of times.

(State category association table: FIG. 33)
The state category association table of FIG. 33 defines the identification and type of the state category, and the assignment of the mode selection tables Ta to Td to this status category.

  In the state category association table of FIG. 33, four factors are involved in determining the state category. The first factor is whether the gaming state when the mode transition trigger is established and the special symbol variation display operation is started is a high probability state or a low probability state (high or low probability state). The factor is whether or not an open extension function is given (presence of electric support). Therefore, the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is shown by adding a to d in FIG. 33, (a) high probability state + high base state (with electric support) = probability change state, (b) high probability state + Low base state (without electric support) = latent probability change state, (c) Low probability state + high base state (with electric support) = Short time state, (d) Low probability state + Low base state (without electric support) = Normal state , And is classified into four.

  The third factor involved in the determination of the state classification is whether or not there is a drop-in-hold-winning presence that exists when the mode transition opportunity is established, that is, in the hold memory that is stored with an upper limit of four, the winning lottery is won Whether or not there is a prefetched (holding fall winner). Therefore, the probability variation state and the latent probability variation state described above are classified into cases where there is a fall-on-hold winning (e, g column) and cases where there is no fall-on-hold winning (f, h column), respectively. That is, when there is a fall-on-hold winning in the probability change state (e column), when there is no fall-on-hold win in the probability change state (f column), and when there is a fall within the hold in the latent probability change state (g column). In the latent probability change state, there is a case where there is no fall-on-hold winning (column h).

  And the fourth factor involved in the determination of the state classification is whether or not the big hit lottery is won in the hold memory that is stored up to four in the presence or absence of hold big hit winning (reserved consecutive chain) Whether or not there is something to be done (successful winning on hold). Therefore, when there is a case where there is a fall-on-hold winning in the above-mentioned probability change state (e, f column), there is a case where there is a further jackpot winning win and a case where there is no jackpot winning win (j, k; l, m column), and when there is a fall-on-hold win in the latent probability change state (g and h columns), there is a case where there is a hold-on big win and a case where there is no hold-on big win (n , O; columns p and q).

  In other words, with respect to the probability change state (column a), when the probability change state is with a hold-down fall winning and with a hold-in jackpot win (column j: state classification K1), with a probability change state with a hold-in fall winning and no hold-in jackpot winning (K column: state classification K2), if there is a winning change in the hold without falling within the hold in the probability change state (l column: state division K3), and a big hit in the hold without falling within the hold in the probability change state If there is no winning, it is classified as (m column: state classification K2). Also, regarding the latent probability change state (column b), in the latent probability change state, if there is a fall-on-hold win and on-hold big hit win (n-column: state classification K5), and if the latent probability change state is on-hold fall winning If there is no big hit winning (o column: state category K6), if there is a chance to win in the hold without change in the latent probability change state and if there is a big hit in the hold (p column: state category K7), and in the case of falling within the hold in the latent probability change state If there is no winning big hit in the hold, it is classified as (q column: state classification K8).

  Next, in the short-time state (column c) and the normal state (column d), the gaming state is already in the low probability state, so there is no event of falling from the high probability state. Therefore, the i column of falling within the hold is blank. Therefore, the short-time state (column c) and the normal state (column d) are further classified into a case where there is a big hit in holding and a case where there is no big hit in holding (r, s; t, u columns). In other words, for the short-time state (column c), there is a case where there is a jackpot winning in holding in the short-time state (column r: state classification K9) and a case where there is no winning jackpot in holding in the time-saving state (column s: state classification K10). being classified. As for the normal state (column d), there is a case where there is a jackpot winning in the normal state (t column: state classification K11), and a case where there is no jackpot winning in the normal state (column u: state classification K12). are categorized.

  One of the mode selection tables Ta to Td is assigned to each of the state sections K1 to K12 determined by the combination of the above four factors. In the present embodiment, the mode selection table Ta is provided for the state sections K1 to K4, K9, and K10, the mode selection table Tb is provided for the state sections K6 and K12, and the mode selection table Tc is provided for the state sections K5, K7, and K11. The mode selection table Td is assigned to the state classification K8.

(Production mode transition lottery table: FIG. 34)
FIG. 34 is an effect mode transition lottery table showing the relationship between the mode selection tables Ta to Td and the effect modes A to E. The production modes A, B, C, and D are determined so that the high probability expectation increases in this order, the production mode D is a big hit confirmation mode, and the production mode E is in a high base state and a big hit can be expected. It is a chance production mode.

  The production mode transition lottery table of FIG. 34 includes items of the mode selection tables Ta to Td, and each item Ta to Td has a number of cells corresponding to the production modes A to E that are the transition destinations. In each cell of each list, selection ratios for the production modes A to E, that is, distribution ratio values (selection ratio values) are set in a predetermined allocation distribution. For example, the items in the mode selection table Ta are composed of a list of five cells corresponding to the production modes A to E, and the first cell in the list has a selection rate value for the production mode A in the second cell. Is the selection rate value for the production mode B, the third cell is the selection rate value for the production mode C, the fourth cell is the selection rate value for the production mode D, and the fifth cell is for the production mode E. Each selectivity value is set.

  In the list of each item of the mode selection tables Ta to Td, the selection rate values (percentage values) of the mode selection tables Ta to Td when the overall distribution rate for the production modes A to E is 100% are as follows: The weights are set so as to obtain a predetermined selection distribution (distribution distribution) as a whole. In the case of this embodiment, the distribution distribution with respect to the production modes A to E differs for each mode selection table Ta to Td as follows. That is, the selection rate values of the production modes A, B, C, D, E are 0%, 0%, 0%, 0%, 100% in the mode selection table Ta, 60%, 30% in the mode selection table Tb, 10%, 0%, 0%, mode selection table Tc is 10%, 30%, 50%, 10%, 0%, and mode selection table Td is 10%, 30%, 60%, 0%, 0%. It has become.

  Therefore, the mode selection tables Ta to Td include the first mode selection table Td in which the selection ratio for the rendering modes A to C increases in the same forward direction as the order of the rendering modes with low high probability expectations (A to C). The second mode selection table (Tb) in which the selection ratio with respect to the production modes A to C increases in the reverse direction to the production mode order (C to A) in which the high probability expectation is large, and the production mode with a low high probability expectation The third mode selection table Tc includes a selection ratio for the effect mode in which the selection ratio for the effect modes A to C is increased in the same forward direction as the order (A to C) and the jackpot is determined. Furthermore, it has the 4th mode selection table Ta which transfers to chance time production in the ratio of 100%.

  And, in the low base state (columns b and d in FIG. 33) to which the release extension function is not added and the gaming state is in the low probability state or there is a holding memory related to the falling within the holding In the columns (g and i in FIG. 33), the second mode selection table (Tb) is selected in accordance with the selection ratio on the condition that there is no holding storage related to winning in holding (K6 in FIG. 33, K12) The third mode selection table (Tc) is selected according to the selection ratio on the condition that there is a holding storage related to the winning in holding (K5, K1 in FIG. 33).

  In addition, in a high base state to which an open extension function is added (column a in FIG. 33), the game state at the start of the fluctuation is in a high probability state, and there is a holding memory related to the falling within the holding in the holding. If not (column f in FIG. 33), the first mode selection table (Td) is selected according to the selection ratio (K4 in FIG. 33) on the condition that there is no holding storage related to winning in holding. ), The third mode selection table (Tc) is set so as to be selected according to the selection ratio (K5, K1 in FIG. 33) on condition that there is a holding storage related to the winning within holding. The

  If the game state at the start of the change is in a low probability state (columns c and i in FIG. 33) under the high base state to which the extension extension function has been added, the reservation related to the winning in the internal reservation will be held. On the condition that there is no memory, the first mode selection table (Td) is selected according to the selection ratio (K10 in FIG. 33), and on the condition that there is a holding memory related to winning in the holding, the selection ratio Accordingly, the third mode selection table (Tc) is selected (K9 in FIG. 33).

  However, in the case of this embodiment, the state classification association table is in a high base state to which an open extension function is added (a column in FIG. 33), and the gaming state at the start of variation is in a high probability state and is suspended. In the case where there is no holding memory related to falling within the holding in the inside (column f in FIG. 33), and in a high base state to which an open extension function is added, the gaming state at the start of change is in a low probability state If present (columns c and i in FIG. 33), the same fourth mode selection table (Ta) is selected instead of the first mode selection table (Td) (K1 in FIG. 33). ~ K4, K9 ~ K10) are set.

(26-1. Relationship between presence / absence of falling-on-hold winning and production modes A to E: FIGS. 33 to 34>
Production modes A to E are selected via the mode selection tables Ta to Td described above.

(In the case of state divisions K1 to K4 = probable change state)
Referring to FIG. 33, in the case of state classifications K1 to K4, that is, when the gaming state at the start of variation is a high probability state and “probable change state” with electric support (a column), the fall winning is held within the hold. Regardless of whether it is a certain case (e column) or a case where there is no fall winning within the hold (f column), the same “mode selection table Ta” is selected for all of the state categories K1 to K4. Is done.

  The mode selection table Ta is a table set so that the effect mode E is selected 100% and no other effect mode is selected (see FIG. 34). Therefore, when the mode transition opportunity is established under the probability change state (state categories K1 to K4), the effect mode E is selected via the mode selection table Ta, and the chance time effect mode (which is likely to be a big hit under the high base state) FIG. 35 (e)) is started.

  For example, if the mode transition opportunity is established when the big hit game ends and the probability change state is entered (or when a specific reach fluctuation pattern is received), the chance time effect mode is started along with the start of the special symbol fluctuation display operation. (Production mode E) starts. The transition to the chance time effect mode is performed regardless of whether or not there is a hold memory related to the fall-on-hold win and the on-hold big hit win at the start of the change. In other words, when the transition of the production mode occurs under the certain change state, the chance time production mode of the production mode E is always started.

(In the case of state classifications K5 to K8 = latency probability variation state)
In the case of state classifications K5 to K8, that is, when the gaming state at the start of the change is a high probability state and a “latent probability change state” (column b) without electric support, when the mode transition opportunity is established, The type of mode selection table to be selected differs depending on whether or not there is a pending storage of falling winnings.

(In the case of status classification K5 to K6 = falling within the hold)
When there is a fall-on-hold winning in the latent probability changing state (g column), the mode selection table Tc or Tb is selected (n column, o column). Here, the mode selection table Tc is selected when there is a big hit in the hold (state category K5), and the mode selection table Tb is selected when there is no big win in the hold (state division K6).

  The mode selection table Tc is set so that the selection rate values for the production modes A, B, and C (FIGS. 35 (a) to (c)) increase in this order, and the big hit determination production mode D (FIG. 35 (d)). Is also set to remain 10%. In other words, the selection rate values of the production modes A, B, and C are the production modes A (the production mode A (B <C <D) in which the high probability expectation is the highest in the order in which the high probability expectation increases). (Selection rate value 10%), production mode B (selection rate value 30%) with a high degree of high probability expectation, production mode C (selection rate value 50%) with the highest high probability expectation, and high probability expectation Although it is low, the production mode D (selection rate value 10%) in which the big hit is fixed is set. Therefore, as a means of implying that the player is in a high probability state and has the possibility of a big hit, when there is a drop-on-hold win and a big hit in hold (state category K5), the mode selection table Tc is Assigned to be selected.

  On the other hand, the mode selection table Tb is set so that the selection rate values for the effect modes A, B, and C (FIGS. 35A to 35C) become smaller in this order, and the jackpot confirmed effect mode D (FIG. 35 ( The possibility of selecting d)) is set to be 0%. That is, the selection rate values of the production modes A, B, and C are the production mode A with the lowest high probability expectation (selection value 60%) and the production mode B with the medium high probability expectation (selection value 30%). The production mode C (selection rate value 10%) with the highest high probability expectation is the production mode D (selection rate value 0%) in which the big probability is low but the big hit is fixed. As a means of notifying the player that there is a high probability of falling within the hold, the mode selection table Tb is selected in the case where there is a fall within the hold and there is no big hit in the hold (state category K6). So that it is assigned.

(State category K7 to K8 = When there is no fall-on-hold winning)
Next, when there is no fall-on-hold winning in the latent probability change state (h column), the mode selection table Tc or Td is selected (p column, q column). Here, the mode selection table Tc is selected when there is a big hit in the hold (state category K7), and the mode selection table Td is selected when there is no big win in the hold (state division K8).

  The mode selection tables Tc and Td are both set so that the selection rate values increase in the order of the production modes A, B, and C, which are the order in which the winning expectation degree increases. The difference is that the mode selection table Tc is a big hit There is a possibility that the effect mode D that is confirmed (possibility 10%), and there is no possibility that the effect mode D that confirms the big hit is selected (possibility 0%) for the mode selection table Tc. Therefore, if there is no fall-on-hold winning in the latent probability change state, the player is informed by the implied information that there is a possibility that he is still in a high probability state and that there is a possibility of winning the on-hold big hit lottery. As a means to do this, when there is a big hit in the hold (state category K7), the mode selection table Tc is assigned to be selected. Similarly, in the case where there is no fall-on-hold winning in the hold in the latent probability change state, and there is no win-on-hold winning in the hold (state category K8), the fact that there is a possibility of still being in a high probability state is notified by implicit information. As a means, the mode selection table Td is assigned to be selected.

(In the case of state divisions K9 to K10 = short-time state)
On the other hand, when the gaming state at the start of change is a low probability state, an event of further falling from that state cannot occur (i column: blank). Therefore, in this case, only the presence / absence of the pending continuous chain is a factor for selecting the type of the mode selection table.

  First, in the case of state divisions K9 to K10, that is, when the gaming state at the start of change is a low probability state but a high base state with electric support (short time state: column c), when the mode transition opportunity is established, The mode selection table Ta is selected regardless of whether or not the hold memory existing in the hold is the big hit winning hold memory. Therefore, it shifts to the chance time effect of the effect mode E which has a possibility of a big hit under the high base state via the mode selection table Ta. The chance time effect in the effect mode E is the same as the chance time effect selected in the state classifications K1 to K4 under the high probability state and is indistinguishable. Therefore, when shifting to the chance time effect, the player expects the gaming machine to be in a high probability state.

(4-2-4. State divisions K11 to K12 = normal state)
Next, in the case of state classifications K11 to K12, that is, in the low probability state and the low base state without power support (normal state: column d), if there is a big hit hold memory in the hold (column t) (state Section K11), mode selection table Tc is selected, and if there is no jackpot holding storage in the holding (column u) (state section K12), mode selection table Tb is selected. This mode selection table Tb is set so that the selection rate values of the production modes A, B, and C become smaller in this order, and the possibility of selecting the big-decision production mode D is set to 0%. . Therefore, as a means for notifying the player that there is a high possibility of falling within the hold, the mode selection table Tb is assigned to be selected when there is no win in the hold (status division K12). .

(26-2. Features of the destination distribution in the production mode)
The above-described destination mode distribution table consisting of FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 has the following features.

(Feature 1)
When not falling within the hold (state divisions K3 to K4, K7 to K8: columns f and h) than when falling within the hold (state divisions K1 to K2, K5 to K6: e, g columns) ) Is more likely to shift to a production mode with a high probability of expectation.

  This is because, even if there is a relationship of whether there is a fall-on-hold winning, the same chance time effect is produced between the state divisions K1 to K2 (e column) and the state divisions K3 to K4 (f column) via the mode selection table Ta. Since mode E is selected, there is no difference. Also, even if there is a relationship of whether or not there is a fall within the hold, the same mode selection table Tc is used between the state division K5 (g column) and the state division K7 (h column) when there is a big hit in the hold. Since one of the production modes A to D is selected with the same selection rate distribution, there is no difference. Therefore, there is only a difference between the state division K6 (o column) and the state division K8 (q column) in the relationship between whether there is a fall-on-hold winning and the difference between the two. That is, when there is no big hit in the hold, between the state division K6 (column o) and the state division K8 (q column), the mode selection table Tb is selected in the former, while the mode selection table Td is selected in the latter. Selected. This is because the contents of the mode selection tables Tb and Td are different as follows.

  On the other hand, the mode selection table Tb is determined such that the selection rate values for the production modes A, B, and C are the lower selection rate values in the order of the production modes A, B, and C. It reaches 60% (FIG. 34). However, from the viewpoint of high probability expectation, since the high probability expectation increases in the order of the effect modes A, B, C, and D, the effect mode A having the highest selectivity value has the highest probability expectation. This is the lowest production mode. On the other hand, the mode selection table Td is determined so that the distribution of the selection rate values for the production modes A, B, and C is opposite to that of the mode selection table Tb, and the selection rate values are higher in the order of the production modes A, B, and C. Thus, the selection rate value for the production mode C reaches 60% (FIG. 34). In addition, since the high probability expectation is determined to increase in the order of the production modes A, B, C, and D, the production mode C having the highest selection rate value is the production mode having the highest high probability expectation. There is a relationship.

  Therefore, from these points, when there is no holding memory that wins the falling lottery in the holding than when there is a holding memory that has won the falling lottery in the holding (when there is a falling lottery in the holding) ( It can be seen that it is easier to make a transition to a production mode with a high probability of expectation in the case of no fall-on-hold winning.

(Feature 2)
In addition, the mode selection tables Tc and Td have similar distributions of selection rate values for the production modes A, B, and C, and the higher the ratio of transition to the production mode with a high probability of expectation, the higher the on-hold lottery lottery. The possibility of winning is also high, and if the production mode D is selected on the production mode transition lottery table via the mode selection table Tc, the winning of the on-hold big hit is confirmed. Therefore, the player wins the on-hold jackpot lottery as the proportion of the production modes A, B, and C that shifts to the production mode with the high probability of high probability (the production modes A, B, and C are higher in order) is higher. You will expect that. In addition, when the transition to the night background effect of the effect mode D is made, the player knows that the player will immediately win a big hit just by the appearance of the night background effect. Until it is put into operation, it waits until the hold memory (the one with the highest rank in the order of digestion) existing before the prefetch target hold is used for the change display operation and digested, and those changes You will enjoy the notice effect that appears in the display operation (for example, continuous notice effect).

(Figure in parentheses in Fig. 33)
In the above embodiment, when there is electric support (when the state divisions K1 to K4 = probable change state and the state divisions K9 to K10 = short time state), when the mode transition trigger is established, the production mode E is selected via the mode selection table Ta. The chance time directing mode, which is the directing mode under the high base state, is started. That is, when there is electric support, the same production mode E is shifted regardless of whether the probability state is high, whether there is a fall in the hold, and whether there is a continuous change in the hold.

  However, as suggested in FIG. 33, the mode selection table Tc may be selected when the on-hold big hit is won, and the mode selection table Td may be selected when the on-hold big hit is not won. Since the mode selection tables Tc and Td are set so that the selection rate values increase in the order of the production modes A, B, and C, the mode selection table Tc or Td is selected as in the case of selecting the mode selection table Ta. By making a selection, it is possible to maintain the expectation that the player is still in a high probability state.

  It should be noted that the mode selection table Tc is selected when the status categories K1, K3, and K9 are on-hold big hit, and the mode selection table Td is selected when the status categories K2, K4, and K10 are not on-hold big hit. The reason is that there is a possibility that the jackpot confirmed effect mode D is selected for the mode selection table Tc (possibility 10%), but the jackpot confirmed effect mode D is likely to be selected for the mode selection table Tc. It is used properly considering the difference that there is no (possibility 0%).

(Change of Tc selectivity value distribution in FIG. 34)
In the case of the embodiment described above, the mode selection table Tc has a distribution of selectivity values for the production modes A, B, and C that is opposite to that of the mode selection table Tb, and becomes a higher selection rate value in the order of the production modes A, B, and C. The selection rate value for the production mode C reaches 60% (FIG. 34). However, while maintaining the relationship that it is easier to shift to a production mode with a high probability expectation than the case of falling within the hold, the distribution of selectivity values Can be changed to those having the same tendency as the mode selection table Tb. For example, the distribution of the selection rate values for the production modes A, B, and C in the mode selection table Tc may be the production mode A (40%), the production mode B (30%), and the production mode C (20%), respectively. it can. Even if it sets in this way, since the ratio in which the production mode A is selected is reduced from 60% to 40%, the mode selection table Tc has a higher probability of expectation than the mode selection table Tb. The relationship that it is easy to select can be maintained. In this case, since the mode selection table Tc is all selected when the on-hold big hit lottery is won, for example, the player has won the big hit lottery because it was in a high probability state. Will be understood.

(26-3. Production mode transition in specific example 2A of the second embodiment: FIG. 29)
In the specific example 2A of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, a mode selection table Tc or Td in parentheses is selected in the state sections K1 to K4 (probability variation state) and K9 to K10 (short time state) in FIG. Is dealing. At the time t1 in the figure, the 15R probable big win is won, and thereafter the symbol variation display operation with electric support is started from the time t2 when the 15R big hit game ends, and until the time te when the 100th symbol variation comes. In the meantime, a case is shown in which a drop-in prize is generated (time t6) and various production mode transition triggers are established (time t2 to t5, t7 to t8).

(A) When a jackpot end command is received (time t2 in FIG. 29)
In the case of a big hit game, there is no hold memory related to the drop-in prize, and when the big hit end command is received at time t2 in FIG. 29 and the mode change trigger is established, the transfer destination in the production mode change lottery process (step S748) With reference to the mode distribution table (FIGS. 33 to 34), the transition destination production mode is selected in accordance with the state classification. The game situation at this time corresponds to the state category K4 (high-base probability change state, no fall-on-hold winning and no big hit on-hold winning) in FIG. Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state division K4 of the state division association table in FIG. 33, and the production modes A and B are displayed on the production mode transition lottery table in FIG. 34 based on the selection of this mode selection table Td. , C is selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60%.

  Specific example A in FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode C (the evening background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 60%. In consideration of the effect mode D in which the big hit is confirmed and the effect mode E which is the chance time effect, the effect mode C having the highest high probability of expectation among the effect modes A to C (the evening background in FIG. 35). ) Means that the lottery was selected. When the effect mode C is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the evening background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player guesses that the gaming state is in a high probability state by shifting to the production mode C (evening background).

  At time t2, when the on-hold big hit lottery is won (state category K3), the mode selection table Tc is selected, and the production modes A, B, C, D on the production mode transition lottery table of FIG. Are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, 50%, 10%. That is, regarding the high probability expectation, the mode selection tables Tc and Td show the same tendency (the order of the effect modes A, B, and C), but when the effect mode is selected via the mode selection table Tc, There is a possibility that the effect mode D for determining the big hit will be selected. This relationship is the same at times t4, t5, t7, and t8, which will be described later.

(B) Non-roll-off prize (time t3 in FIG. 29)
At time t3 of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, it is assumed that a case where a holding storage related to a non-falling winning occurs under the above-described production mode C is case 1 (no falling-on-hold winning).

  In Case 1, initially, under the state where the number of reserved memories is 3, a new winning ball is generated and “hold 4” is generated, and the reserved data is prefetched. Note that “hold 4” is “pre-read target hold” related to a non-falling prize.

  When this “hold 4” prefetch target hold occurs, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery as to whether or not to make a prefetch notice by the continuous notice effect. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice lottery is won and it is determined that the falling lottery is not won, a notice selection table before falling corresponding to the number of holds is set. In this example, a pre-fall notice selection table relating to the hold number 3 is set. Then, the lottery is performed for the continuity rank of the change start time continuous announcement effect that continues across the hold from the time when the number of the hold storage is reduced to 3 after the start of the “hold 1” symbol change. Since the current gaming state is in the production mode C, there is no notice on the continuity table (not shown), 1 notice α, 2 notice β, 3 notice γ, 4 notice δ is 0%, 10 %, 10%, 30%, and 50%.

  In this example, it is assumed that four notices δ having a selection ratio of 50% are selected on the continuity table. For this reason, four times up to the hold 4 (pre-reading target hold) related to the non-falling prize is set in the second continuous notice counter as the number of continuous notices (step S819). As a result, the lightning warning and its sound effect appear in the four symbol variation display operations of the hold 1 to the hold 4 and the continuous notice effect is executed.

  On the other hand, with regard to the pre-reading notice (continuous notice) of the hold display changing system, a dedicated hold display effect scenario is set when it is determined that the hold memory of “hold 4” is generated and the pre-read notice lottery is won. “4” corresponding to the number of reserved storage is set in the first continuous notice counter. As a result, the reserved storage position of the “hold 4” changes to, for example, red, and is continuously displayed while sequentially shifting the display position until the reserved storage of the “hold 4” is subjected to the symbol variation display operation. become.

  In this case 1, the number of continuations of the change-type continuous notice effect at the start of change (the number of times that the lightning notice is continuously displayed across the hold) is equal to the number of continuations of the pre-read notice of the hold display change system ("hold 4"). The number of times the red hold position is displayed continuously across the hold). If the gaming state falls to a low probability state or if you are on-hold falling, the notice selection table after the fall will be referenced, so the number of continuations is the same as the number of continuations of the change-type continuous notice effect at the start of change. May end before reaching. However, in this example, in addition to the transition to the production mode C (evening background), the continuous notice production by the lightning notice reaches the red holding position of “hold 4”, that is, the “hold 4” of red hold changes the design. It continues until it is used for display operation. Therefore, the player is convinced that the gaming state has not fallen into the low probability state.

(C) When a specific variation pattern designation command is received (time t4 in FIG. 29)
When a specific change pattern designation command (for example, reach change pattern designation command for designating a specific reach effect) is received and a mode change opportunity is established at time t4 in the specific example 2A shown in FIG. In the process (step S748), the transition destination mode distribution table is referred to, and the transition destination production mode is selected in accordance with the state classification. The game situation at this time is not different from that at time t2, and is in the state category K4 (high-base probability change state, no on-hold falling win, no on-hold big hit win) in FIG. Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state division K4 of the state division association table in FIG. 33, and the production modes A and B are displayed on the production mode transition lottery table in FIG. 34 based on the selection of this mode selection table Td. , C is selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60%. FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 30%. This indicates that among the production modes A to C, the production mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) having the second highest probability of high probability has been selected. When the effect mode B is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the daytime background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player is a little worried that the game state may have fallen to a low probability state due to the transition from the effect mode C (evening background) to the effect mode B (day background).

(D) When winning the effect mode lottery (time t5 in FIG. 29)
At time t5 of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, a change pattern command other than the specific SP reach change pattern is received, and the mode change opportunity is triggered by winning the effect mode change lottery performed on the effect control unit 24 side. The case where it is established is shown.

  Also in this case, the transfer destination mode distribution table is referred to in the effect mode transfer lottery process (step S748), and the transfer destination effect mode is selected in accordance with the state classification. The game situation at this time is not different from that at time t2, and is in the state category K4 (high-base probability change state, no on-hold falling win, no on-hold big hit win) in FIG. Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the category K4 of the state category association table in FIG. 33, and based on the selection of this mode selection table Td, the production modes A, B, C is selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60% (step S801 in FIG. 38). FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode C (the evening background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 60%. This indicates that among the production modes A to C, the production mode C (the evening background in FIG. 35) having the highest high probability expectation has been selected. When the effect mode C is set (step S802 in FIG. 38), the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the evening background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player estimates that the gaming state has not fallen to the low probability state by returning from the production mode B (daytime background) to the production mode C (evening background).

(E) In the case of a drop-in prize (time t6 in FIG. 29)
At time t6 of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29, it is assumed that a hold storage related to the drop-in / out prize occurs under the effect mode C. Here, a case 2 (with a fall-on-hold winning) will be described as an example.

  FIG. 12A shows a situation in which a new winning ball is generated and “hold 4” is generated under a state where the number of stored storage is three, and the hold data is prefetched. Note that “hold 4” is “pre-read target hold” related to the falling-in prize.

  When the hold storage of “hold 4” occurs, the effect control unit 24 performs a lottery as to whether to perform a pre-reading notice by the continuous notice effect. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice lottery is won and the falling lottery is won, a post-fall notice selection table corresponding to the number of holds is set. In this example, a post-fall notice selection table related to the number of holds 3 is set. Then, the lottery is performed for the continuity rank of the change start time continuous announcement effect that continues across the hold from the time when the number of the hold storage is reduced to 3 after the start of the “hold 1” symbol change. Since the current gaming state is in the production mode C, there is no notice on the continuity table, 1 notice α, 2 notice β, 3 notice γ, 4 notice δ are 30%, 10% and 40%. , 20%, and 0%.

  In this example, it is assumed that the twice notice β with a selection ratio of 40% is selected on the continuity table. For this reason, the second consecutive notice counter is set as the number of consecutive notices up to the second hold before the hold 4 (prefetch target hold) related to the non-falling winning a prize. Thereby, in each symbol fluctuation display operation for two times of the hold 1 and the hold 2, the lightning bolt notice and the sound effect thereof appear and the continuous notice effect is executed.

  However, regarding the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display change system, when it is determined that the hold memory of “hold 4” has occurred and the pre-reading notice lottery has been won, a dedicated hold display effect scenario is set, Corresponding “4” is set in the first continuous notice counter. As a result, the reserved storage position of the “hold 4” changes to, for example, red, and is continuously displayed while sequentially shifting the display position until the reserved storage of the “hold 4” is subjected to the symbol variation display operation. become.

  In this case 2, the number of continuations of the change-type continuous notice effect at the start of change (the number of times the lightning notice is continuously displayed across the hold) is the number of continuations of the look-ahead notice of the hold display change system ("hold 4" The red hold position does not match the number of times that the hold position is continuously displayed across the hold. If the gaming state falls to a low probability state or if you are on-hold falling, the notice selection table after the fall will be referenced, so the number of continuations is the same as the number of continuations of the change-type continuous notice effect at the start of change. May end before reaching. In this example as well, although the transition is made to the production mode C (evening background) with the highest probability of high probability, the continuous notice production by lightning notice does not continue until the red hold position of “Hold 4”, but in front of it. When “hold 2” is used for the variable display operation, it is finished. Therefore, the player can deduce that there is a possibility that the gaming state has fallen into the low probability state.

(F) When the number of times of losing fluctuation display operation continues for a predetermined number of times (time t7 in FIG. 29)
A time t7 in the specific example 2A illustrated in FIG. 29 indicates a case where it is determined that the mode transition opportunity is established because the number of times of the loss variation display operation has continued for a predetermined number of times. In this example, a loss variation number counter is provided on the side of the effect control unit 24, and the counter is used to accumulate the number of received loss variation pattern commands, and the accumulated value is a predetermined number of times 30 (see FIG. 29). When it reaches 30 times n (n is an integer of 1 or more), it is determined that the mode transition trigger has been established.

  Even in the case of time t7, when it is determined that the mode transition opportunity has been established, in the effect mode transfer lottery process (step S748), the transfer destination mode distribution table is referred to and the transfer destination effect mode is determined according to the state classification. Lottery. Since the game situation at this time is after the time t6 when the drop-in prize has occurred, it is in the state category K10 of FIG. 33 (high base time-short state and no winning big hit in hold). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state division K10 of the state division association table in FIG. 33, and the production modes A and B are displayed on the production mode transition lottery table in FIG. 34 based on the selection of this mode selection table Td. , C is selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60%.

  FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode A (morning background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 10%. This indicates that among the production modes A to C, the production mode A (morning background in FIG. 35) having the lowest high probability expectation has been selected. When the effect mode A is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the morning background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player guesses that there is a possibility that the gaming state has fallen to a low probability state by returning from the production mode C (evening background) to the production mode A (morning background) (actually time This guess is wrong because it has already fallen at t6).

(G) Further, the number of times of losing fluctuation display operation continues for a predetermined number of times (time t8 in FIG. 29)
The time t8 in the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29 indicates a case where it is determined that the mode transition opportunity is established because the number of times of the loss variation display operation has continued for a predetermined number of times. In this example, a loss variation number counter is provided on the side of the effect control unit 24, and the counter is used to accumulate the number of received loss variation pattern commands, and the accumulated value is again set to a predetermined number of times 30 (see FIG. 29). Is shown as 30 × (n + 1) th), it is determined that the mode transition opportunity has been established (step S703: YES).

  Since the game situation at this time is not different from that at time t7 (state division K10), the operation in the case at time t8 is the same as that at time t7. However, at time t8, among the effect modes A to C, the effect mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) with a high probability of expectation in the middle rank is shown. When the effect mode B is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the daytime background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player connects the expectation that the gaming state may still be in a high probability state by returning from the production mode A (morning background) to the production mode B (daytime background) (actually Has already fallen at time t6).

(H) When electric support is completed (time te in FIG. 29)
The time te of the specific example 2A shown in FIG. 29 exemplifies the case where the electric support is completed and the mode transition opportunity is established. At this time te, since the treasure box effect set in step S743 in FIG. 20 has priority, the transition of the effect mode cannot occur. However, since it is also possible to generate them in duplicate, a case where they are generated in duplicate will be described here.

  Although not shown, the production control unit 24 sets the remaining electric support number of times that the electric support is ended when the remaining electric support number command transmitted in step S407B of the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 12) is received. To do. Each time the decorative design designation command transmitted in step S415 (FIG. 12) is received, 1 is subtracted from the number of remaining electric support, and when the zero support is reached, that is, when the electric support is finished, Is determined to have been established. However, as another method, for example, when the power support number counter is zero, a power support end command is transmitted, and when the effect control unit 24 receives the command, it may be determined that the mode transition trigger has been established.

  In any case, when the electric support is completed and the mode transition opportunity is established, in the effect mode transfer lottery process (step S748), the transfer destination mode distribution table is referred to, and the transfer destination effect mode is determined according to the state classification. Lottery.

  The game situation at this time is after the time t6 when the drop-in prize has occurred and the electric support has been completed, so that it is in the state category K12 of FIG. Therefore, the mode selection table Tb is selected in the state division K12 of the state division association table in FIG. 33, and the production modes A and B are selected on the production mode transition lottery table in FIG. 34 based on the selection of the mode selection table Tb. , C is selected at a selection ratio of 60%, 30%, 10%.

  FIG. 29 shows a case where the effect mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 30%. This indicates that among the production modes A to C, the production mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) having the second highest probability of high probability has been selected. When the effect mode B is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the daytime background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player determines that the possibility that the gaming state is still in the high probability state is low because of the transition from the production mode B (daytime background) to the production mode B (daytime background). Has already fallen at time t6).

  As described above, in the case of the specific example 1 of FIG. 29, the player has selected the two-time notice β having a low “continuity rank” at the time t6 when winning the on-hold falling lottery (the lightning notice is subject to prefetching). It is determined that the state has fallen from the high probability state to the low probability state (this determination is correct as a result), and thereafter the production mode C with the highest high probability expectation (the evening background in FIG. 35) ), If a treasure chest effect occurs at time te, it is judged that the treasure chest effect must have fallen almost when the treasure chest effect occurs, and the result of the treasure chest effect is not expected to be very successful. It will be.

(26-4. Production Mode Transition in Specific Example 2B of Embodiment 2: FIG. 30)
In the specific example 2B of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, a mode is selected in which the mode selection table Ta is selected in the state sections K1 to K4 (probability variation state) and K9 to K10 (time reduction state) in FIG. At the time t1 in the figure, the 15R probable big win is won, and thereafter the symbol variation display operation with electric support is started from the time t2 when the 15R big hit game ends, and until the time te when the 100th symbol variation comes. It is a case where no falling prizes occur. At the time t2 when the 15R jackpot game ends, at the time te when the 100th symbol variation has arrived, an effect mode transition opportunity is established, and during the subsequent period, a drop-in prize occurs (time t6), and various effect mode transitions occur. An opportunity is established (time t3 to t5, t7 to t8). In order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that no hold memory related to the falling prize is generated during the big hit game.

(A) When a jackpot end command is received (time t2 in FIG. 30)
In the case of a big hit game, if there is no on-hold storage related to the drop-in prize, and a big hit end command is received at time t2 in FIG. With reference to the distribution table (FIGS. 33 to 34), the transition destination production mode is selected in accordance with the state classification. The game situation at this time corresponds to the state category K4 (high-base probability change state, no fall-on-hold winning and no big hit on-hold winning) in FIG. Therefore, the mode selection table Ta is selected in the state division K4 of the state division association table in FIG. 33, and the production modes A and B are selected on the production mode transition lottery table in FIG. 34 based on the selection of the mode selection table Ta. , C, D, and E are selected at a selection ratio of 0%, 0%, 0%, 0%, and 100%. That is, the effect mode E (chance time effect) is selected at a selection rate of 100%. This means that the production mode E (night in FIG. 35 + rainy background) having a chance to win a game has been selected for the transfer lottery. When the effect mode E is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the night + rain background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player estimates that the game state is in a high-probability state and is highly likely to be a big hit by shifting to the production mode E (night + rainy background).

(B) When electric support is completed (time te in FIG. 43)
The time te of the specific example B shown in FIG. 30 exemplifies the case where the electric support is completed and the mode transition opportunity is established (the establishment of the mode transition opportunity is the same as the specific example 1). Also in the case of this specific example B, at the time te, the treasure box effect set in step S743 of FIG. 20 has priority, so the transition of the effect mode cannot occur. However, since it is also possible to generate them in duplicate, a case where they are generated in duplicate will be described here.

  When the electric support is completed and the mode shift opportunity is established (step S703: YES), the process shifts to the effect mode shift lottery process (step S704, step S801 in FIG. 38 for details), and refers to the shift destination mode distribution table. In accordance with the state category, the destination production mode is selected (step S801 in FIG. 38). The game situation at this time corresponds to the state category K8 (low-base latent probability change state, no fall-on-hold winning, no big hit on-hold winning). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state division K8 of the state division association table in FIG. 33, and the production modes A and B are displayed on the production mode transition lottery table in FIG. 34 based on the selection of this mode selection table Td. , C is selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60%.

  FIG. 30 shows a case where the production mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 30%. This means that the production mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) with the high probability expectation degree in the middle rank has been lottery selected. When the effect mode B is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the daytime background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player does not win the jackpot lottery, and the production mode E (chance time production: night + rain background) with 100 electric support ends, and the player shifts to the production mode B (day background in FIG. 35). Therefore, although worried that the gaming state has fallen to a low probability state, he / she will participate in the treasure box production while expecting the desired possibility that the gaming state is still in a high probability state.

  Note that, when the on-hold big hit lottery is won at time te (state category K7), the mode selection table Tc is selected, and the production modes A, B, C, and D on the production mode transition lottery table of FIG. Are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, 50%, 10%. That is, there is a possibility that the effect mode D for determining the big hit is selected.

(C) When a non-roll-off prize is won (time t3 in FIG. 30)
At time t3 in FIG. 30, it is assumed that the case where a hold memory related to a non-falling prize occurs under the above-described effect mode B is Case 1 (no drop-on-hold winning).

  In case 1, a new winning ball is generated under the condition that the number of stored storage is three, a “hold 4” of the pre-read target hold related to the non-falling-off winning is generated, and the hold data is determined to be pre-read. is there.

  If this “hold 4” pre-read target hold occurs, if it is determined that the pre-reading notice lottery about whether or not to make the pre-reading notice by the continuous notice effect is won and it is determined that the falling lottery is not won, Set the notice selection table. Then, the lottery is performed for the continuity rank of the change start time continuous announcement effect that continues across the hold from the time when the number of the hold storage is reduced to 3 after the start of the “hold 1” symbol change. Since the current gaming state is in the production mode B (daytime background), there is no notice, no notice α, 2 notice β, 3 notice γ, 4 notice δ on the continuity table (not shown). Selection is made at a selection ratio of 10%, 20%, 20%, 20%, 30%.

  In this example, it is assumed that four notices δ having a selection ratio of 10% are selected on the continuity table. For this reason, four times up to the hold 4 (pre-reading target hold) related to the non-falling prize is set in the second continuous notice counter as the number of continuous notices. As a result, the lightning warning and its sound effect appear in the four symbol variation display operations of the hold 1 to the hold 4 and the continuous notice effect is executed.

  On the other hand, with respect to the pre-reading notice effect of the hold display changing system, the determination in step S825 of FIG. 40 is YES when it is determined that the holding storage of “hold 4” occurs and the pre-reading notice lottery is won. The dedicated hold display effect scenario is set, and “4” corresponding to the hold storage number is set in the first continuous notice counter. As a result, the reserved storage position of the “hold 4” changes to, for example, red, and is continuously displayed while sequentially shifting the display position until the reserved storage of the “hold 4” is subjected to the symbol variation display operation. become.

  In this case 1, although the mode is shifted to the production mode B (daytime background), the continuous notice production by the lightning bolt notice is up to the red hold position of “hold 4”, that is, the “hold 4” of red hold is the symbol variation display operation. Continues until served. Therefore, the player determines that the gaming state has not fallen into the low probability state.

(D) When a specific variation pattern designation command is received (time t4 in FIG. 30)
When a specific change pattern designation command (in the figure, a specific SP reach change pattern designation command) is received at time t4 in FIG. 30 and the mode change opportunity is established, the process proceeds in the effect mode change lottery process (step S748). The destination mode distribution table is referred to, and the transition destination production mode is selected in accordance with the state classification. The game situation at this time is not different from that at the time te, and is in the state category K8 of FIG. 33 (low-base latent probability change state, no on-hold falling win, no on-hold big hit win). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state division K8 of the state division association table in FIG. 33, and the production modes A and B are displayed on the production mode transition lottery table in FIG. 34 based on the selection of this mode selection table Td. , C is selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60%.

  FIG. 30 shows a case where the effect mode C (the evening background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 60%. This means that, among the production modes A to C, the production mode C (the evening background in FIG. 35) having the highest high probability expectation has been selected. When the effect mode C is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the evening background of FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker. Therefore, the player guesses that the gaming state is in a high probability state by shifting to the production mode C (evening background).

  At time t4, when the on-hold big hit lottery is won (state category K7), the mode selection table Tc is selected, and the production modes A, B, C, D on the production mode transition lottery table of FIG. Are selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, 50%, 10%. That is, regarding the high probability expectation, the mode selection tables Tc and Td show the same tendency (the order of the effect modes A, B, and C), but when the effect mode is selected via the mode selection table Tc, There is a possibility that the effect mode D for determining the big hit will be selected. This relationship is the same at times t5, t7, and t8, which will be described later.

(E) When winning the effect mode lottery (time t5 in FIG. 43)
Time t5 in FIG. 30 shows a case where a mode transition opportunity is established by receiving a variation pattern command other than a specific SP reach variation pattern and winning the rendering mode transition lottery performed on the rendering control unit 24 side. .

  Also in this case, the transfer destination mode distribution table is referred to in the effect mode transfer lottery process (step S748), and the transfer destination effect mode is selected in accordance with the state classification. The game situation at this time is not different from that at the time te, and is in the state category K8 of FIG. 33 (low-base latent probability change state, no on-hold falling win, no on-hold big hit win). Therefore, the mode selection table Td is selected in the state division K8 of the state division association table in FIG. 33, and the production modes A and B are displayed on the production mode transition lottery table in FIG. 34 based on the selection of this mode selection table Td. , C is selected at a selection ratio of 10%, 30%, and 60%. FIG. 30 shows a case where the effect mode C (the evening background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection ratio of 60%. Therefore, the player estimates that the gaming state is in a high probability state by shifting from the rendering mode C (evening background) to the rendering mode C (evening background).

(F) In the case of a drop-in prize (time t6 in FIG. 43)
At time t6 in FIG. 30, it is assumed that case 2 (with in-hold fall winning) occurs when a hold memory related to a drop-in prize is generated under the production mode C. The operation in this case is the same as that described at time t6 in FIG.

  At this time t6, although it has shifted to the production mode C (evening background) with the highest high probability of expectation, the continuous notice production by the lightning notice does not continue to the red hold position of “hold 4”, but before that. When “hold 2” is used for the variable display operation, it is finished. Therefore, the player estimates that there is a possibility that the gaming state has fallen into the low probability state.

(G) In the case where the number of times of losing fluctuation display operation continues for a predetermined number of times (time t7 in FIG. 43)
Time t7 in specific example 2B shown in FIG. 30 exemplifies a mode transition opportunity (the establishment of this mode transition opportunity is the same as in specific example 2A) because the number of times of the loss variation display operation has continued a predetermined number of times.

  When it is determined that the mode transition opportunity has been established, the process shifts to the effect mode transfer lottery process (step S748), the transfer destination mode distribution table is referred to, and the transfer destination effect mode is selected in accordance with the state classification. Since the game situation at this time is after the time t6 when the drop-in prize has occurred, it is in the state category K12 of FIG. Therefore, the mode selection table Tb is selected in the state division K12 of the state division association table in FIG. 33, and the production modes A and B are selected on the production mode transition lottery table in FIG. 34 based on the selection of the mode selection table Tb. , C is selected at a selection ratio of 60%, 30%, 10%. FIG. 30 shows a case where the effect mode A (morning background in FIG. 35) is selected at a selection rate of 60%. This indicates that among the production modes A to C, the production mode A (morning background in FIG. 35) having the lowest high probability expectation has been selected. When the effect mode A is set, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 is switched to the morning background in FIG. 35, and the corresponding effect BGM flows from the speaker.

  Therefore, in addition to the fact that the continuous notice effect by lightning notice does not continue until the pre-reading target suspension at time t6, the player at the time t7, from the effect mode C (evening background) to the effect mode A (morning background). Therefore, it is presumed that the gaming state has fallen to the low probability state is almost deterministic (because it has already fallen at time t6, this guess is correct).

(H) Further, when the number of times of losing fluctuation display operation continues for a predetermined number of times (time t8 in FIG. 30)
At time t8 in FIG. 30, the integrated value of the loss variation counter that counts the number of received variation variation pattern commands is 30 times a predetermined number of times again (shown as 30 × (n + 1) th in FIG. 43). Is reached and the mode transition opportunity is established. Since the game situation at this time is not different from that at time t7, the operation of the case at time t8 is the same as that at time t7.

  However, at time t8, among the effect modes A to C, the effect mode B (the daytime background in FIG. 35) with a high probability of expectation in the middle rank is shown. Therefore, the player connects the expectation that the gaming state may still be in a high probability state by returning from the production mode A (morning background) to the production mode B (daytime background) (actually Has already fallen at time t6).

<27. Specific Example 3A, 3B of Embodiment 3>
Also in the probability variation fall type 2 of the third embodiment (sections d to e in FIG. 24), as with the probability variation fall type 1 of the second embodiment (sections b to c in FIG. 24), skepticism associated with the left-handed guidance notification. An effect and a skeptical effect associated with the left-handed guidance notification appear, and an effect mode effect that suggests the current gaming state can be displayed.

(27-1. Specific Example 3A of Embodiment 3)
Category d in the third embodiment is an electric support guarantee after falling into a short-time state in a “probable fall type 2” gaming machine in which the probability change state continues even if the electric support guarantee exceeds 100 rotations and the fall lottery is not won. Since the 100th rotation has arrived, and the time from the short time state to the normal state at the 101st rotation of the next symbol variation, the relationship between the launch direction guidance notification and the treasure box effect at the time when this electric support guarantee 100th rotation has arrived (specifically Example 3A) is the same as that of specific example 2A (see specific example 2A, time te shown in FIG. 29).

(27-2. Specific Example 3B of Embodiment 3: FIG. 36)
FIG. 36 shows a skeptical effect that doubts the continuation of the electric support state in the category e in the “probability change fall type 2” gaming machine in which the probability change state continues even if the electric support guarantee exceeds 100 rotations if the winning lottery is not won. Is a specific example when the treasure box effect appears (specific example 3B in category e).

(27-2-1. Launch direction guidance notification and treasure box production: t6 in FIG. 36)
In specific example 3B of the third embodiment, at the 130th rotation (see time t6), the falling lottery is not won even if the electric support guarantee 100 rotations in the probability variation state is exceeded, and the probability variation state continues thereafter. Winning the falling lottery, the symbol change of the 130th rotation becomes a normal state, the electric support is lost, and the right strike is in a disadvantageous state for the player. Therefore, at the beginning of the 130th symbol change, the guidance notification image 373 is switched from the right arrow image 374a to the left arrow image 374b of “left arrow right move” and whether or not the probability change state continues, that is, the electric support state. The treasure box production appears as a skeptical production that doubts the continuation of.

  The only difference between the right-pointing arrow image 374a and the left-pointing arrow image 374b is that the direction of the arrow image is switched from the right direction to the left direction, and the moving direction is not changed before and after the switching. In addition, a treasure box image 371 shown in FIG. 25B appears in the liquid crystal screen, and a player-participation-type treasure box production is started. Attention will be directed to that. As a result, it is delayed to notice that the guidance notification image 373 has changed from right-handed notification to left-handed notification, and the time when the player stops launching is not from the beginning of the symbol variation, but of the symbol variation. It slips to the end or the end. Therefore, it is possible to have the player enjoy the treasure chest production.

(27-2-2. Gase's treasure box production: t4 in FIG. 36)
In FIG. 36, the command of the SP reach fluctuation pattern (successful treasure box production) is transmitted at time t4 during the probability change state before the drop-in winning prize, and there is a relationship with the fall into the treasure box production of the gusset, that is, the state without electric support. There will be a production with no power (always with electric support). Therefore, it can be difficult to distinguish whether it is a real treasure chest production (failed treasure chest production) or a Gase treasure chest production (successful treasure chest production) due to the occurrence of this treasure chest production. Will increase and interest in the ball game will increase.

(27-2-3. Production mode transition to inform the fall of it: FIG. 43)
In the specific example 3B of the third embodiment, the transition to the production mode notifying the fall from the electric support state to the non-electric support state is the same as that described in the specific example 2B (FIG. 30) of the second embodiment. is there.

<28. Production Mode in Embodiment 4>
In the ST machine type of the fourth embodiment (section f in FIG. 24), when the predetermined number of STs is finished and the electric support is not provided, switching to left-handed guidance notification is performed. Therefore, the left-handed guidance notification is associated with the symbol variation without the electric support, over one or more symbol variations from the symbol variation, or over multiple symbol variations before and after the symbol variation. It is configured to produce a skeptical performance. However, in the case of the fourth embodiment, as described above, since the end timing of the electric support state is fixed, in the symbol variation in which there is no electric support state, or over one or more symbol variations from the symbol variation. Or, if it is only to make a skeptical effect appear across multiple symbol variations before and after the symbol variation, it simply notifies the end of the power support state (the end of the ST specified number of times) It will be a thing. Therefore, the treasure box effect according to the fourth embodiment is preferably used as a notice effect that gives the winning expectation feeling of a big hit, as in the second embodiment. Specifically, during ST, in the case of a specific loss variation pattern (for example, SP reach variation pattern), a “real treasure chest effect (failed treasure chest effect)” appears, and in the case of a hit variation pattern, “ “Gase's treasure chest production (successful treasure chest production)” is made to appear. Treasure chests that indicate the player's expectation of expectation rather than simply displaying treasure chest effects by changing the pattern around the ST specified number of times by making real treasure chest effects and Gase treasure chest effects appear at appropriate frequencies Opportunities to pay attention to the production increase, and it is possible to delay the time when the player recognizes that the guidance notification image 373 has been switched.

<29. Other display modes of firing guidance information>
In the above embodiment, the right-handed display mode and the left-handed display mode are defined as follows as means for displaying in a very close mode. That is, as the “display mode indicating the right-handed direction” of the guidance notification image 373, a “right arrow right movement” movement in which a plurality of right-pointing arrow images 374a are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move in the right direction at a constant speed or intermittently. As a “display mode indicating the left-handed direction”, a “left arrow right move” motion in which a plurality of left-pointing arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move in the right direction at a constant speed or intermittently. A typical display mode was used (FIGS. 25A and 25B and FIGS. 28A and 28B). Then, this was displayed in the same or substantially the same position on the liquid crystal screen in the same or substantially the same size and the same color. On the LCD screen, (i) display at the same or approximately the same position, (ii) display at the same or approximately the same size, (iii) display at the same (system) color, (iv) move in the same direction Or it was the thing of the display mode which included the element of carrying out slide display. In addition, by configuring in this way, a gaming machine in which the player does not significantly impair the interest by taking time to notice the change of the guidance notification mode without displaying a false lie to the player. I was able to do it.

  However, the conditions of the same or substantially the same size and the same color at the same or substantially the same position on the liquid crystal screen do not necessarily have to be held as common matters between the right-handed notification and the left-handed notification. As a means for displaying the right-handed display mode and the left-handed display mode in a very close mode, one of them, for example, the dynamic display mode of “Right arrow right shift” and the “left arrow right shift” dynamic display mode If you can get the initial effect of making it difficult to understand and make it difficult to understand the switch to left-handed notification, it is free to do other elements on the LCD screen. Can be displayed in different positions, displayed in different sizes, or displayed in different colors.

  In the above embodiment, only the “arrow image” is handled as a constituent element of the guidance notification image 373, and a plurality of the display images are arranged in a straight line. A message image using characters may be used as a component of the guidance notification image 373, and the “message image using characters such as left-handed” may be used alone to configure the guidance notification image 373.

  Also, instead of using “arrow image” or “message image with characters such as left-handed” alone, a combination of “arrow image” and “message image with characters such as left-handed” or “arrow image” and The guidance notification image 373 may be configured by a combination of “message image with characters such as left-handed” and “significant symbols and patterns”. As the display mode, for example, the guidance notification image 373 can be displayed in a display mode in which a “message image by characters such as left-handed” and an “arrow image” are arranged in a straight line.

  In the above embodiment, the display mode is a display mode in which a plurality of components of the guidance notification image 373 are arranged in a straight line. However, the number of components of the guidance notification image 373 is not limited, and is not necessarily aligned in a straight line. It does not have to be. In addition, even if it is said to be a straight line, a case where it is almost a straight line is allowed, and a part or all of the lines may be displayed in a plurality of lines in such a manner that a plurality of arrows run in a direction crossing the traveling direction.

  In the above embodiment, the guidance notification image 373 is displayed in a part of the area on the liquid crystal screen. However, it is also possible to adopt a display mode that moves and passes across the screen from one end of the screen toward the other end.

<Modification 2>
In the first to sixth embodiments, as the “display mode indicating the left-handed direction” of the guidance notification image 373, a plurality of the left-pointing arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and sequentially move to the right at a constant speed or intermittently. The “dynamic display mode” of “left arrow right shift” is used, and the left-handed guidance notification by the “left arrow right shift” dynamic display mode continues until a predetermined output end time (FIG. 23). Steps S781 to S783). However, this left-handed guidance notification does not necessarily have to be displayed in the same display mode until the end over the entire period until the predetermined output end time. Easy-to-understand dynamic display mode of “left arrow left shift” in which a plurality of left-pointing arrow images 374b are arranged in a straight line and move sequentially in the left direction at a constant speed or intermittently from the middle of the entire period until the output end time. You can also switch to This is in order not to impair the reliability of the gaming machine.

  In the first to sixth embodiments described above, the display effects by the guidance notification images “right-handed notification” and “left-handed notification” have been described as examples. It is not limited to the case of changing the display mode of the probability change state notification lamp or the like.

<Modification 3>
Other image display effects, such as hold display and character display, change the display mode in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition (such as when a specific effect control command is received) It is also applicable to the case where More specifically, the character (left of the hold display) shown in FIG. 25A is set so as to change according to the number of times of change and other conditions (the number of times of reach, winning of a change lottery, etc.). In such a case, when the mode changes, the player's attention may be once diverted from the character by generating the treasure box effect described above.

  In addition, referring to FIG. 25 and the like, the “treasure box effect” is a notice effect (““ It was explained as “skeptical performance”), but is not limited to this. For example, a treasure box effect and other effects may be used as “expectation effect (generic name for effects in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is set relatively high)”.

  Furthermore, when using the above-mentioned effect as an expectation effect, the use of the above-mentioned “attention distraction effect” makes it possible to provide a gaming machine that makes the player feel more interesting. This will be described in detail below. In this example, a representative example will be described in which a pre-reading notice (holding change notice) of a hold display change system is adopted as an expectation effect.

  Specifically, the “hold display” is performed on the liquid crystal screen as a first object (meaning object, target, purpose, etc.) that directly or indirectly indicates the expected winning degree by the display (or display change). Here, “displaying the winning expectation level directly or indirectly” due to the display mode of the “operation hold ball” or the change of the display mode is, for example, blue when a white hold display is defined as the normal display mode The expected expectation is about 1% to 10% when changing to, the expected expectation is 20% to 30% when changing to green, and the expected expectation is indirectly such as 40% to 50% when changing to red That indicate the winning expectation directly, such as “100% (definite)” when the figure changes to “rainbow” or the number “100%” is added (Those that clearly indicate the expectation of winning)

  When the first object is displayed (or changed in display) or is displayed, another second object is displayed. Here, as the display of the second object, for example, “character” is displayed (character image display). This second object may itself be an expectation effect, a notice effect (low expectation effect) in which the winning expectation is not relatively high, or a notice effect that does not indicate the win expectation (for example, An effect that occurs regardless of the big hit lottery result or an effect that occurs regularly (specific background change effect) may be used.

  In the case where the second object is also an anticipation notice, the character can be displayed near the center of the screen when the hold display is made. A plurality of types of characters to be displayed are prepared (for example, characters A to D), and if the character A is the default (initial setting) pattern as in the case of the hold display change, the winning expectation increases when the character B is displayed. When the character C is displayed (expectation level is low), the expectation level is further increased (expectation level is high). Further, any of the characters A to D may be displayed at the display start time, or may be configured to change to another character after any of the characters is displayed.

  Here, the characteristic point of this example relates to the “display start timing” and “display end timing” (both “display period”) of the first object and the second object, and “display position”. ”,“ Display size ”, and“ display hierarchy priority (priority) ”.

<Display start timing, display end timing, display period>
The hold display itself is basically displayed at all times except for a predetermined timing such as a specific SP reach if there is an operation hold ball, but about “hold change (change to dedicated hold display mode)” Since it is determined by a pre-reading notice lottery, it does not necessarily occur every time, and the frequency of occurrence is appropriately set according to the gameability of the gaming machine. The “display start timing” here refers to the occurrence of this “hold change” and refers to the start point of switching from the hold display mode A to the hold display mode B. The time point when the display mode is completely switched from the hold display mode A to the hold display mode B is set as the display end timing, and the display period (display change period) is set between the display start timing and the display end timing. Thus, the display period refers to a period of specific display (here, hold change), and the object (here, hold display) includes a non-display state in one or both of the periods before and after the display period. It is not limited to things. If necessary, the terms “display change start timing”, “display change end timing”, and “display change period” may be substituted.

  The period required for the hold change is not limited to one type, and may be two or more types. For example, when the color changes from white to blue, the special effect is not used and the change is completed in a short time (for example, 50 msec). When the color changes from blue to red, a bomb is placed on the blue hold display and explodes. The change is completed in a relatively long time (for example, 500 msec) using special effects such as changing to a red hold display after being covered with smoke or gradually changing the blue hold display to a red hold display. You may make it do. However, even if a special effect appears, the reserved color does not change (the bomb does not occur and the reserved color does not change). By allowing the real thing and the gaze to appear, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of holding changes.

  Based on the above matters, when the relationship between the “hold display” as the first object and the “character display” as the second object is rearranged, if the more important display is the hold display, Using the “deviation production”, the display timing, display period, etc. of each production are coordinated well so as to distract attention from the hold display. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG.

  FIG. 37 shows an example in which a character appearance effect for causing the character A to appear is adopted as a distraction effect when a reserved change notice is scheduled for a specific existing reserved display. FIG. FIG. 38 is a time chart related to a hold change notice and a display example of character A in FIG. 37. In FIG. 37, the hold display that is the subject of hold change is the hold icon of the hold display portion c <b> 1 in the hold display area 76.

  Referring to FIGS. 37 and 38 (a), first, an operation holding ball is generated (time t1 in FIG. 38 (a)), and an on-hold display is started (FIG. 37 (a)). At this stage, it is normal white color reservation. Then, in the state where the pending change notice has not been started (time t1 to time t2 in FIG. 38 (a)), the female character A is displayed at the approximate center of the screen (time t2 in FIG. 38 (a), FIG. 37). (B)). Here, as shown in FIGS. 37 (b) to (d), the character A is made to appear at a predetermined timing before the change in hold, and then the player approaches the player side while waving his hand and talks. It is a character appearance production that expresses. While this character A is displayed and the player is paying attention to the character A, the holding change is started (time ta in FIG. 38, FIG. 37 (d)). Here, as an example of the hold change notice, the hold change notice in which the white hold gradually changes to the red hold.

  Then, after the hold change is finished (time tb in FIG. 38 (a), FIG. 37 (e)), the display of the character A is finished (time t3 in FIG. 38 (a), FIG. 37 (f)). In the case of this example, the character A appears (displays) a predetermined time before the hold change is made, and at least the period from the start of the hold change to the end of the hold change (time ta to tb in FIG. 38 (a)). And the character A is displayed (Character A display period from time t2 to t3 in FIG. 38A). As a result, the player who was distracted by the character A will change the hold display to another display form sometime thereafter (here, the normal hold display form (white hold) to the dedicated hold display form (for example, red hold) It will be surprising to notice that it changes to (). In particular, in the character appearance effect in this example, a “conversation effect” in which information related to the game is displayed in a balloon is also executed (FIG. 37 (e)), and the player's consciousness is suitable for the information in the balloon. As a result, the player's attention can be effectively diverted from the pending change notice. Regarding this hold change, it is considered that the degree of wonder when the player notices the hold change increases as the state changes to a dedicated hold display mode (high expectation effect) with a high expectation of winning. In this way, the hold change notice with the distraction effect can exert an effect effect with impact rather than making the hold change notice appear alone.

  In the example of FIG. 38 (a), the case where the first object starts changing and ends within the period during which the second object is displayed (the display change period of the first object within the second object display period). The case where everything is included was explained. In this example, the display start time (time t2) of the second object may coincide with the change start time (time ta) of the hold display, or the display end time (time t3) of the second object and the hold display. The change start time (time tb) may be the same. In other words, the display control of the second object can be performed in parallel with the first object display so that the entire display change period of the first object is included.

  Further, not limited to the example of FIG. 38 (a), as shown in FIG. 38 (b), as long as only one of the change start or change end of the first object is included in the display period of the second object. The minimum distraction effect is demonstrated. In other words, the display control of the second object can be performed in parallel with at least a part of the display change period of the first object. Specifically, referring to FIG. 38 (b), the “holding change period C” shown in the figure includes the change display start time (time te) of the hold display included in the display period (time t 2 to t 3) of character A. However, the change end time (time tf) of the hold display is an example not included in the display period of the character A. Further, in the illustrated “holding change period B”, the change start time (time tc) of the hold display is not included in the display period of the character A, but the change end time (time td) of the hold display is in the character A display period. Examples are included.

<Display position>
In the above example, it is possible to change the display mode of the character display (for example, the display mode of one person character can be changed, or one person can be increased to three identical or different person characters). In this case as well, it is preferable to distract attention from the pending change. For example, after one person is displayed on the right side of the liquid crystal screen, after a while (after a predetermined time has elapsed), one person is also displayed on the left side of the screen. As a result, the player who was watching the character on the right side of the screen would then pay attention to the character on the left side of the screen, and the player's interest would reach multiple events, distracting attention from the hold display at the bottom of the screen. be able to. Thus, as the second object display, the second image display effect (second notice effect) can be displayed after the first image display effect (first notice effect) is displayed.

<Display size>
In addition, when a large object and a small object (or a collective and an individual) are displayed as display objects, the player's attention and line of sight are easily directed to a large object (aggregate). When it is desired to secretly change by using this, it is possible to deflect the line of sight by displaying a larger one (or plural ones). By utilizing this, it is possible to distract attention from the holding ball by displaying a large character display (or a plurality of display).

<Display hierarchy priority>
Also, the expression “distract attention” does not necessarily have to be displayed completely independently at the same timing. That is, the character may be displayed on the hold display (so as to cover the front of the hold display) at the timing when the hold change is performed (target confidential type distraction effect). As a result, the player can no longer visually recognize the hold display, and as a result, attention is distracted from the hold display. Note that the hold display may be completely hidden by the character, or a part of the hold display may be visible. In this case, taking into account that the hold display (the current number of active hold balls) is kept in a concealed state, the operation hold ball at another place (meaning another place or another display means on the display area). If the number is displayed, the player can be prevented from being confused.

  The first object has been described as “hold display” and the second object has been described as “character display”. However, the first object side may be “character display” and the second object side may be “hold display”. Is possible. Since the purpose is common and the purpose is to temporarily deviate from the high importance production, if the high importance production is the character display side (first object), the hold display side is the second object. This is a means to distract from the character display. In this case, the above-described display timing, display position, display size, and the like naturally correspond to this.

  In addition, the first object and the second object are not limited to the above two types, and there are possibilities for all other displayed objects. However, it is preferable that at least the first object display (on the object display side for the purpose of distraction) is an expectation effect that can suggest the winning expectation degree. Further, as already described, the degree of wonder when the player notices is greater when the high expectation effect (first object display) is the target of distraction. Therefore, in the case of a notice effect that can suggest a high or low winning expectation level due to a difference in display mode, such as a hold change notice, a display mode with a relatively low winning expectation level (for example, the hold display is blue on hold). Or a yellow display or a green hold, etc., when a display mode (for example, the hold display is red hold, D pattern hold or rainbow hold) is displayed with a relatively high expectation of winning. However, it is preferable to execute the distraction effect (second object display) with a high probability.

<Modification 4>
In the third modification, the example using the image display effect as the “attention distraction effect” has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, people use a tendency to pay attention to things that move three-dimensionally, and use movable body effects (such as sound effects and light that appear with the movement of movable body objects). (Including the production), the player's attention can be diverted from the target object (the display object such as the pending change described in the third modification). Specifically, (α) the movable object effect appears in place of the second object display (character A in FIG. 37), or (β) the movable object effect appears along with the second object display, or (γ ) The second object is displayed as a precursor effect as a movable body effect. In particular, in the case of the above-described form (γ), the second object display is displayed following the movable body effect. Therefore, the second object display is further displayed after the player's attention once turns to the movable body accessory. Since the player's attention can be diverted in two steps, that is, the player's attention is directed to the liquid crystal screen, the attention to the object (first object display) is lower, which is suitable for obtaining an attention-reducing effect. .

  Note that the movable body accessory is disposed outside the liquid crystal display device. In the case of this example, as shown in FIG. 2, a first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory) 80 is disposed on the upper right side in the center ornament 48, and the second movable body is obliquely below the right side thereof. An accessory (flower type accessory 90) is provided. For this reason, when the player's line of sight faces the movable body accessory, there is a certain time difference from when the movable body effect is visually recognized until the line of sight is directed to the liquid crystal screen effect. Therefore, there may be a case in which a distracting effect can be obtained even if the operation period of the movable body accessory does not necessarily operate in the form of overlapping the holding change period. For example, taking the case of (α) described above as an example, as shown in FIG. 38 (c), as shown in FIG. And the display change period of the holding change (holding change period D: times ty to tz) can be executed without being parallel (overlapping). In the example of FIG. 38C, a period corresponding to the above-described time difference from when the movable body effect is visually recognized until the line of sight is directed to the liquid crystal screen is expressed as “time tx to tz”. These times tx to tz work as a substantial attention distraction period, and if the holding change period is included in all or a part of the period, an attention distraction effect can be obtained.

<Modification 5>
As described above, the effect control unit 24 includes information (for example, look-ahead variation pattern information, variation pattern information (variation time information) included in a winning command, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a winning game command, and the like. , And control the appearance of various notice effects based on the reach production type (including information on presence / absence) and pseudo-ream), jackpot lottery result information (win lottery result information, symbol lottery result information, etc.) . Among the notice effects, representative examples of the notice effects by image display include display patterns relating to reach effects, pseudo-continuous effects, prefetching notice effects, character notice effects, cut-in notice effects, step-up notice effects, and the like.

(6-1. Notice effect using color elements 1: FIG. 39)
Next, “notice effect using color elements” will be described. Here, “color element (color vision)” has the same meaning as “color”. Therefore, just like when you say “color”, there are “chromatic colors” that include all three dimensions of hue (hue), lightness, and saturation (saturation), and “achromatic colors (white, Ash, black) ”. In particular, the expression “using color elements” does not mean that there is coloration, but the main aspect is that only a part of the screen is colored, and the entire screen is colored. This is because it is expressed as a nearness that the case of the embodiment is subordinate. Hereinafter, the same applies to the case where “color” is used in the present specification to express, for example, “character image color”. Unless otherwise specified, the character image displayed on a part of the screen is colored. Shall mean.

  The “notice effect by image display” handled in the present embodiment is a display mode in which a plurality of display objects similar to a part of the screen are displayed as images, in other words, “notice effect using color elements”. . “Similar” refers to the similarity between display objects so that the player may recognize the display objects (components) of the same kind because some of the display modes are common. Therefore, for example, display objects having different shapes (for example, ◯ and △) are unified with the same achromatic color (white or black) or have the same specific color (red, rainbow, etc.). Therefore, when the players are similar and recognized together, the different display objects (◯ and Δ) are “similar display objects”. In other words, even in the case of display objects having the same shape (for example, an image simulating a dog as an animal), only the same color is applied to a part of each display object (part of the torso of the dog). If the player can recognize that there is a commonality with respect to the entire display (the entire dog) because the colors are the same, the entire shape (the entire dog) including the colored portion (the torso) ), They are “similar displays”.

  Here, as a plurality of similar display objects displayed on the screen, a “character notice effect” imitating a person will be described as one of the notice effects. This character notice effect is generated as a part of the notice effect or as a demonstration screen effect during a period when the symbol variation is stopped.

  FIG. 39 exemplifies the character notice effect, and belongs to the so-called “image display notice effect”. In the case of the illustrated character notice effect, a plurality of four character (display pattern component group) images a to d are displayed in the liquid crystal screen. The character images are common in that they all have the same person shape, and the player recognizes that they are a plurality of similar display objects or the same plurality of display objects.

  FIG. 39A shows a display mode in which four same character images a to d that are colored in a background image, that is, are displayed in color, are displayed as a normal reach effect in the character notice effect. Is shown. All of the character images a to d are displayed in the same chromatic color, the background is the same as that of the normal chromatic color of the decorative design, and the hold display is not changed from the normal white color. State (no pending change notice). However, since four character images a to d appear, it is informed that the winning expectation is medium among the three levels of large, medium and small.

  FIG. 39 (b) shows that in the character notice effect, the winning expectation is very high, and the character is rectangular around the outline of one of the four character images a1 to d1 (character image c1). The display mode which appears surrounded by the background image is shown. The difference from FIG. 39 (a) is that (i) one of the four character images (specific character image) c is colored with “white” having a high brightness among achromatic colors. (Ii) The other character images a, b, and d are achromatic, and the character images' a1, b1, and d1 are colored with “black” having a low lightness. And (iii) the decorative pattern whose fluctuation has been stopped is changed to a decorative pattern image colored with “black” having a low brightness among achromatic colors, and (iv) a character image (specific character image) c1 is The point is that the character image is changed to a character image c1 surrounded by a rectangular character background image colored with “black” having low brightness among achromatic colors. The background and hold display are also in color display and there is no color change. In addition, when the outline and the inside of the character outline are black, since the character's face and the like are unknown, the character is displayed as a so-called silhouette image. The character background image is used as a background image for emphasizing the character image. The shape of the character background image is not limited to a rectangular shape, and surrounds the character image such as a circular shape, an elliptical shape, or a polygonal shape. If it is a background image expressed like this, it will not specifically limit. However, the character background image may be omitted, and at least the points (i) to (ii) described above may be different from FIG. The character background image is similar to the aura image shown in FIG.

  Here, the specific character image c1 is expressed as a character image colored with “white”, but if the display object on the liquid crystal screen is “colored with white”, the outline of the display object outline is black. Including the form that is white during drawing and the outline of the display object outline and the form in which the outline is white, and the white brightness and transparency are such that the lower image on which white is applied appears to overlap The case where it has moderate brightness and transparency and the case where it does not have this are included. Here, the case where the outline of the character outline is black and the inside is white and the lower image to which white is applied has an appropriate brightness and transparency so that it appears to be superimposed is "colored in white" (The same shall apply hereinafter in FIGS. 39 to 41).

  The other character images a, b, and d are expressed as character images colored with “black”, and the decorative symbols whose fluctuation has been stopped are expressed as decorative symbols colored with “black”. When an object is said to be `` colored black '', the outline of the display object is white and the inside is black or gray, the outline of the display object is black and the inside is ash, When the outline and the inside contain black form, and the brightness and transparency of the black or ash have the brightness and transparency that the lower image on which the black is applied appear to overlap, and do not have it Including. Here, with respect to other character images a, b, and d, the decorative image whose fluctuation has been stopped has a black outline with an outline of the outline of the character or the decorative pattern, and a lower image to which ash is applied. The case where it has moderate brightness and transparency enough to appear to overlap each other will be referred to as “colored in black” (the same applies to FIGS. 39 to 41).

  When the character notice effect is displayed in the display mode of FIG. 39 (b) instead of the display mode of FIG. 39 (a) as described above, the player's attention is first that the normal chromatic character images a to d are displayed. This is directed to the appearance of the notice effect (FIG. 39B) including the achromatic character images a1 to d1 instead of the notice effect (FIG. 39A). Here, if the character images a1 to d1 are all displayed in the same achromatic color (in this example, “black” and colored), the impact on the player does not increase any more. However, in the case of the present embodiment, among the character images a1 to d1, only a specific character image c1 has an achromatic color (in this example, “black” that is extremely different in brightness from the other character images a1, b1, and d1. "White color with maximum brightness difference". For this reason, even when it is difficult to understand because it is covered with the whole of a plurality of character images, it is possible to avoid the situation that the notice effect ends without realizing that only one body is different. It becomes possible to notice that only one body is different. Therefore, in addition to the impact caused by the change from the chromatic color display form to the achromatic color display form, a display form appears that the brightness of only a specific character is extremely different, which informs that, for example, the big hit is fixed. It can be recognized that it is a “rare display mode” corresponding to a premium notice. For this reason, the impact or tension given to the player is further strengthened.

  Further, since the specific character image c1 colored in white is separated from the background image by a rectangular image colored in black around the character outline, the difference from the other character images a, b, and d The presence of the background (image) is remarkable. That is, since the specific character image c1 is prominently present with respect to other character images, and the player can find it immediately, a further impact is given to the player.

  In the above, the display mode of the character images a1 to d1 has been changed to black, black, white, and black, respectively, but conversely, even when the display mode is changed to white, white, black, white, Similar effects can be obtained. In addition, when the display modes of the character images a to d before the change are different chromatic colors, for example, blue, yellow, green, and red, it is effective to change the display mode to black and white as described above. However, in the case of chromatic colors of the same system, for example, blue, blue, blue, and blue, it is not necessary to change the display mode of all character images to white or black. That is, only the display mode of the character image c or the character images a, b, and d may be changed to any one of black and white ((blue, blue, white, blue), (blue, blue, black, blue)) , (White, white, blue, white) or (black, black, blue, black)), the same effects as described above can be obtained in this case. In addition, the color that changes the image is not limited to the achromatic color of black and white ash, and may be a color (hereinafter referred to as a monochrome color) in which saturation and color tone do not change in a chromatic color such as blue.

  In addition to the method of comparing “chromatic color” and “achromatic color” as described above, as a method of giving such a second stage impact, there is a relationship of “complementary colors” between the same chromatic colors but also with each other. The method of comparing the two “tones”, the method of comparing the minimum and maximum “saturation” of chromatic colors, and the “image resolution” of the screen that is the means for fixing the image Can be employed, a method of comparing a two-dimensional image with a three-dimensional image, a method of comparing an expression method with that of a deformed or dramatized touch, and the like.

(6-2. Notice Effect 2 Using Color Elements: FIG. 40)
FIG. 40 shows another example of the notice effect produced by contrasting chromatic and achromatic colors as the character notice effect 2. FIG. 40A is exactly the same as FIG. 39A, and the four character images a to d are all displayed in the same chromatic color, and the background is also a decoration that is stopped and changing. The design is also a normal chromatic color (so-called color display), and the hold display is also a white display state of the normal color. However, since four character images a to d appear, it is informed that the winning expectation is medium among the three levels of large, medium and small.

  FIG. 40B shows a display mode in which the four character images a1 to d1 appear in achromatic colors assuming that the winning expectation is very high in the character notice effect. When compared with FIG. 40 (a), FIG. 40 (b) shows that (i) one of the four character images (specific character image) c is achromatic and has high brightness. The character image is changed to a character image c1 colored “white”, and (ii) the character images a1, b1, d1 colored with “black” having a low lightness among the other character images a, b, d are achromatic. (Iii) The decorative pattern whose fluctuation has been stopped is also changed to a decorative pattern colored with “black” having a low brightness among achromatic colors. These relationships are the same as those shown in FIGS. 39 (a) and 39 (b).

  In the character notice effect 2 of FIG. 40 (b), the difference from FIG. 39 (b) is that (iv) the changing decorative pattern is changed to a decorative pattern colored “black”, (v ) The background display object imitating a rock has changed to a background display object colored with “black”, (vi) The hold display icon has changed to a hold display icon colored with “black”, (vii ) The background has changed to a background colored “black”.

  Here, the decorative pattern being changed is expressed as a decorative pattern colored with “black”, the background display imitating a rock is expressed as a background display colored with “black”, and the hold display icon is expressed as “ Although it is expressed as a hold display icon colored with “black”, when it says “colored with black”, the outline of the display object is white and the inside is black or gray, and the outline of the display object is black In addition, it contains the form of ash inside, the outline of the display object outline, and the form of black inside, and the brightness and transparency of the black or ash are such that the lower image on which black or ash is applied appears to overlap. The case where it has the brightness and transparency of this, and the case where it does not have this are included. Here, for the decorative pattern that is changing, the background display object imitating the rock, and the hold display icon, the outline of the display object outline is black and the inside is ash, and the lower image to which ash is applied A case where it has moderate brightness and transparency that appear to overlap each other will be referred to as “colored in black” (the same applies to FIGS. 39 to 41).

  In addition, the background is expressed as a background colored with “black”, but if it says “colored with black”, the entire screen is covered with ash as the background, but the background display object, decoration pattern, character, hold display It has a lightness and transparency that does not hide (the same applies below).

  As described above, when the character notice effect is displayed in the display mode of FIG. 40B instead of the display mode of FIG. 40A, the player first displays the character images a1 to d1, the stopped decorative pattern, and the variation. The decorative pattern, background, background object, and hold display inside are all changed to an achromatic display mode, and thus have a great impact. Moreover, although the character images a1 to d1 are changed to achromatic colors, only the specific character image c1 is colored with “white” with high brightness, and the other character images a1, b1, and d1 are colored. It is colored with “black” with low lightness, and the lightness difference is extremely different between them. For this reason, even if it is one that is covered in the whole of a plurality of character images, there is a significant difference from the color that can distinguish the specific character image c1 from the others, and the player can easily You can notice that only one body is different. Therefore, in addition to the impact caused by the change of the chromatic color display form from the chromatic color display form to the achromatic color display form, only a specific character image appears in a display form with extremely different brightness. Since this can be recognized as, for example, a premium notice notifying that the big hit is fixed, the impact given to the player is further increased.

(6-3. Advance notice effect 3 using color elements: FIG. 41)
FIG. 41 shows another example of the notice effect that contrasts chromatic and achromatic colors as the character notice effect 3. Specifically, the reach effect that notifies that the winning expectation is very high. This is an example of so-called group notice. FIG. 41 corresponds to FIG. 39 (b) and FIG. 40 (b), and illustrations corresponding to 71 (a) and FIG. 40 (a) (all chromatic colors: those in color display) are omitted. ing. That is, FIG. 41 displays a screen on which a second-stage impact is given, in which the chromatic color display notice effect is replaced with a notice effect including an achromatic color display.

  In FIG. 41, the liquid crystal screen shows a display form in which eight identical character images a1 to h1 with achromatic colors appear simultaneously in a chromatic background image. These character images a1 to h1 move from one end side to the other end side of the screen (from the right side to the left side in the present embodiment) and pass through the screen, and show the middle of the movement. ing.

  The eight character images a <b> 1 to h <b> 1 are common in that all display images are given the same achromatic color. However, (i) one of the character images (specific character image) is changed to a character image 'h1 colored with high' brightness' among achromatic colors, and (ii) other Among the achromatic colors, the character images are changed to “black” character images “a1” to “g1” having low brightness. Further, (iii) the decorative pattern that has stopped changing and the decorative pattern that has been changed are changed to a decorative pattern image colored with “black” having a low brightness among achromatic colors. In addition, (iv) the background display object and the hold display icon simulating a rock are also changed to those colored with “black” having a low brightness among achromatic colors. The background remains the original chromatic color.

  As described above, the character notice effect including the group notice is displayed in the achromatic color display mode shown in FIG. 41 in place of the character notice effect that is displayed in the chromatic color (color display) mode including the characters of the group notice. Is displayed, the player first has a large impact because the character images a1 to h1, the stopped decorative pattern, the changing decorative pattern, the background object, and the hold display are all changed to an achromatic display mode. Receive. Moreover, although the character images a1 to h1 are changed to achromatic colors, only the specific character image h1 is colored with “white” having high lightness, and the other character images a1 to g1 have lightness. They are colored with low “black”, and the brightness difference is extremely different between them. For this reason, even if it is one body (character image h1) that is concealed in the whole of the plurality of character images constituting the group notice, the specific character image h1 can be distinguished from the other in terms of color. There is a great difference. For this reason, the player can easily notice that “only one body is different”. Therefore, in addition to the impact caused by the change of the chromatic color display form from the chromatic color display form to the achromatic color display form, only the specific character image h1 in the group notice has a display form in which the brightness is extremely different. Since it has appeared, it can be recognized that this is a premium notice for notifying that the big hit is confirmed, for example, and the impact on the player is further increased.

(6-4. Notice effect 4 using color elements: FIG. 42)
In FIG. 42, as the character notice effect 4, the chromatic color and the achromatic color are contrasted as the first stage of the impact, and the chromatic color and the achromatic color are contrasted between a part of the character and another display object as the second stage. It shows another example of the notice effect.

  FIG. 42 (a) is exactly the same as FIG. 39 (a), and the four character images a to d are all displayed in the same chromatic color, and the background is also a decoration that is stopped and changing. The design is also a normal chromatic color (so-called color display), and the hold display is also a white display state of the normal color. However, since four character images a to d appear, it is informed that the winning expectation is medium among the three levels of large, medium and small.

  FIG. 42 (b) shows that the winning expectation is very high in the character notice effect, and the character is achromatic around the outline of one of the four character images a1 to d1 (character image c1). The display mode which appears by wearing the aura is shown. In the case of FIG. 42B, (i) an aura in which one character image (specific character image) c out of four character images is colored with “white” having a high brightness among achromatic colors. The character image c1 is changed to a uniform character image (ii). The decorative symbol and the suspended display whose variation has been stopped are changed to a decorative symbol colored by “black” having a low brightness among achromatic colors.

  The first feature of the character notice effect shown in FIG. 42 is that the specific character image c1 appears with an aura of achromatic color around the outline of the character, and therefore other achromatic display objects (stopped decorations). There is a unity in color with a symbol and a hold display), and it is in the point of being grasped as a group, that is, similar. That is, by changing to a screen including an achromatic display object, the first stage impact is given to the player.

  The second feature of the character notice effect of FIG. 42 is that the specific character image c1 appears in an aura colored with “white” having a particularly high brightness among the achromatic colors around the outline of the character. Therefore, the difference from other chromatic character images a, b, and d is remarkable in terms of hue (hue), and the same achromatic color but low brightness “black” is colored. In addition, since the brightness difference from other display objects (stopped decorative symbols and hold display) is also large, it is a significant point in comparison with this. In other words, the specific character image c1 is prominent with respect to other chromatic character images and achromatic display objects, and the player can find it immediately, so the impact of the second stage is on the player. Given.

  According to the notice effects 1 to 4 described above, it is possible to give the player a second-stage impact. In this regard, conventionally, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), as many as four character images a to c which are similar in the liquid crystal screen are displayed in chromatic colors, and only that is selected. It was only perceived that a highly promising notice production was revealed. As shown in FIG. 43 (b), if the hold display changes from the normal color white to “red (shaded area in the figure)” indicating that the winning expectation is high, the winning expectation is thereby changed. The situation will be perceived as high, but at this time, the player's attention goes to the reserved color change, so that the role or presence of the notice effect by the character images a to c becomes lighter, and the tension is higher The uplift of the will be solely responsible for the pending change notice. Therefore, it is impossible to give the player the second stage impact.

  The “character notice effect” described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 can be configured such that an effect mode as shown in FIG. 44 can appear. In FIG. 44, for convenience of explanation, a character image mainly intended to draw attention to the player is denoted as “specific character image (for example, c1 in FIG. 39)”, and other character images. Is represented as “non-specific character image (for example, a1, b1, d1 in FIG. 39)”.

  As shown in the figure, images such as “monochrome (monochrome)”, “inverted”, “specific color element”, “shape change”, “blur”, “additional effect”, etc. are displayed for various display objects related to the character notice effect. By using the processing, the specific character image and other images are compared with different color elements and shapes, thereby giving the player a sense of incongruity and drawing attention to the specific character image. In the figure, the character notice effect displayed using the image processing as described above is referred to as a “special expression effect”. In addition to characters, the display objects that can appear during the notice effect are various display objects such as “background image”, “background display object image”, “decorative symbol image”, “hold icon” (hereinafter, particularly necessary). Unless otherwise indicated, these display objects are abbreviated as “background display objects”), but not all of them appear in the character notice effect. Therefore, here, it is assumed that at least one of these background display objects is the target of the image processing. However, as long as the object of the present invention can be achieved in contrast with the specific character image, it is a matter of course that all the display objects may be changed, or only a part may be the target of the special expression.

  The “monochrome” shown in the figure is displayed by changing the display object to an image “colored in white” or an image “colored in black” as described above. Further, the image is not limited to a monochrome gradation (gray), and may be expressed by being changed to an image colored with a single color gradation. For example, the color image may be changed to a sepia image. In this way, “monochrome” changes the display object from a chromatic color to a monochrome color.

  Special expression effect patterns 1 to 7 show an example in which a character image or the like is displayed using this “monochrome” processing. As illustrated, in the pattern 1, the display mode of the specific character image changes from color to monochrome, whereas the non-specific character image is maintained in the color display mode. In pattern 2, the display mode of the non-specific character image changes from color to monochrome, whereas the specific character image is maintained in the color display mode. In the pattern 3, in addition to the display mode of the pattern 2, all or part of the background display object is changed to a monochrome color.

  In the pattern 4, the display mode of the specific character image changes from color to “monochrome color with high brightness (“ monochrome (high) ”” in the figure), whereas the non-specific character image changes from color to “lightness level”. The display mode changes to a low monochrome color (“monochrome (low)” in the figure). “Monochrome color with high lightness” indicates a monochromatic color with a lightness higher than the lightness value serving as a predetermined standard (for example, a monochrome color including light gray to white), and “monochrome color with low lightness” is a predetermined standard The monochrome value of the brightness is lower than the brightness value (which may be different from the reference brightness value when the brightness is high) (for example, a monochrome color including dark gray to black). In the pattern 5 (the example of FIG. 39), in addition to the display mode of the pattern 4, all or part of the background display object changes to the same display mode as the non-specific character image. In Pattern 6, the display mode of the specific character image changes from color to “monochrome color with low brightness”, whereas the display mode of the non-specific character image changes from color to “monochrome color with high brightness”. In the pattern 7, in addition to the display mode of the pattern 6, all or part of the background display object changes to the same display mode as the non-specific character image.

  In addition, “reverse” shown in the figure displays a display object as a so-called “negative / positive inversion” image. For “inversion”, luminance inversion or complementary color inversion may be used. Special expression effect patterns 8 to 10 show examples of displaying character images and the like using this “inversion” process. In the pattern 8, the display mode changes from the color of the specific character image to a color obtained by inverting the negative and positive, whereas the non-specific character image is maintained in the color display mode as it is. In the pattern 9, the non-specific character image changes from a color to a color obtained by inverting the negative and positive, whereas the specific character image is maintained in the color display mode as it is. In the pattern 10, in addition to the display mode of the pattern 9, all or part of the background display object changes to the same display mode as the non-specific character image.

  The “specific color element” shown in the figure is displayed by changing at least one of “color tone”, “lightness”, and “saturation” regarding the display object. The change of “color tone” is to change to a warm color tone (hereinafter referred to as “warm tone”) or a cold color tone (hereinafter referred to as “cool tone”). The change in "lightness" changes to a lightness higher than the predetermined reference lightness value, or lower than the predetermined reference lightness value (which may be different from the lightness value when changing to a higher lightness) It is to let you. The change of “saturation” is a saturation higher than a predetermined reference saturation value, or a predetermined reference saturation value (may be different from a saturation value when changing to a higher saturation) It is to change to lower saturation.

  The special expression effect patterns 11 and 12 show an example in which a character image or the like is displayed by changing the specific color element described above. In the pattern 11, the specific character image changes to at least one of the display modes of warm tone, lightness higher than the reference, and saturation higher than the reference, whereas the non-specific character image is cooler than the reference. The display mode changes to at least one of the lower lightness and the saturation lower than the reference. If the specific character image is changed to a warm tone, the non-specific character image is changed to a cool tone, and if the specific character image is changed to a brightness higher than the reference (original display), the non-specific character image is set to If the specific character image is changed to a higher saturation than the reference, the saturation is changed to a lower saturation than the non-specific character image reference. That is, the specific character image and the non-specific character image are changed in the same category. In the pattern 12, in addition to the display mode of the pattern 11, all or part of the background display object is changed in the same category as the non-specific character image.

  In addition, the “form change” shown in the figure is displayed by changing the form of the display object. Here, “changing the form” means, for example, enlarging or reducing the size, changing a display form from a still image to a moving image, moving image to a still image, and changing a display form from a two-dimensional image to a three-dimensional image, This refers to making a three-dimensional image into a two-dimensional image, deforming or touching a live-action picture, or making a real image. The special expression effect patterns 13 and 14 show an example in which a character image or the like is displayed by the above-described “form change” process. In the pattern 13, the form of the specific character image is changed, while the non-specific character image is maintained as it is. On the other hand, in the pattern 14, the form of the non-specific character image is changed, whereas the specific character image is maintained as it is.

  The “blur” shown in the figure displays various display objects other than the specific character image related to the notice effect by blurring the outline of the image or applying a mosaic to the image. The special expression effect patterns 15 and 16 show an example in which a character image or the like is displayed by this “blur” processing. In pattern 15, the non-specific character image is blurred. In the pattern 16, all or part of the background display object is blurred in addition to the non-specific character image.

The “addition effect” is displayed by adding an effect image to the specific character image.
The effect image is a background image for emphasizing a specific character. For example, the effect image expresses that the aura (afterglow) is wrapped around the character, or a conspicuous image such as the Asahi flag image on the background of the character. Etc. are displayed. In the pattern 17, an effect image is displayed on the specific character, and in the pattern 18, the effect image is displayed on the specific character, and in order to further emphasize the character, all or part of the background display object is displayed in a monochrome color. Change.

  In the above description, various types of character notice effects are obtained by using image processing (special expression) of “monochrome”, “reversal”, “specific color element”, “form change”, “blur”, or “additional effect”. Although the various patterns of special expression effects that change the display mode of the display object have been described, a specific display object may be changed by combining these plural image processes. Thereby, the display mode of the specific character image and other images can be remarkably different from each other and compared, and the specific character image is emphasized, so that the player's attention can be easily directed.

  In the above description, the example has been described in which the display mode of various display objects changes from the color display mode to various special expressions at the timing when a predetermined time has passed since the specific character appeared. When the character appears, it may be displayed in a display form in which special expressions are made from the beginning. That is, the specific character may be displayed in a state where a special expression such as a monochrome color is used instead of a color, and an impact can be given to the player from the time of appearance. In addition, regarding “timing when a predetermined time has elapsed” when the display mode of various display objects changes, some action by a specific character (for example, an action in which a balloon image is displayed and a message of the balloon contents is issued) When a player is in a player-participation stage, before or after a specific notice effect (reach production, pseudo-ream, etc.) or during execution The timing at which the frame effect button 13 is operated may be used, and the timing at which the frame effect button 13 is displayed can be appropriately determined.

  In the above, the character notice effect that appears during the symbol variation display game has been described. However, not only the effect that appears during the decorative symbol variation display game, but also the effect during the demonstration screen display and the hit effect during the winning game Can also produce an image display effect using special expressions.

  FIG. 45 shows a representative example of an effect that can occur as the game progresses and a timing at which an effect that uses special expressions appears during the effect. Note that the time series display (time t) in the figure is given for convenience of explanation, and is not necessarily the time corresponding to the game progress.

  Referring to FIG. 45, a game history effect can appear during the demonstration screen display (time t0 to time t1). When the player operates the frame effect button 13 while the demo screen is displayed, a game history effect appears. In this game history production, as the predetermined game information obtained in the game so far, for example, the winning jackpot type (probable big hit, hourly jackpot), the number of consecutive resorts, the reach production type, the number of fluctuations, a combination of decorative symbols (Game history from the previous day, game history since power-on, etc.) are displayed. Among these histories, specific one or more types of game information can be displayed in color, and other game information can be displayed in monochrome. Specifically, as a specific jackpot history information image, the Renso jackpot history, probability variation jackpot, etc. in the electric support are displayed as a color image, displayed as a single jackpot history information image monochrome image, and if the player is interested Possible history information can be highlighted and displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, during the decorative symbol variation display game (from time t1 to time t2), various notice effects can appear as shown. In these notice effects, when it is desired to emphasize a specific effect (image) display, display using the various special expressions described above is possible. For example, when the reach state is reached after reaching the reach state before reaching the reach (time ta to time tb), the decorative pattern forming the reach state is changed from a normal color display to a monochrome display, By making other images (background images, etc.) color images, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that “there is a different reach than usual, so the winning expectation may be high”. In addition, in the reach production, it is informed that the game is temporarily lost (after the reach production (time tf), during the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol (after time tf)), and in fact, there is a revival production that informs that it was a big hit. When appearing, a combination of decorative symbols in a temporarily stopped state (for example, “767”, etc.) before the rebirth effect is displayed in monochrome, and other images (background image, etc.) are displayed in normal color, or vice versa. By displaying with, after emphasizing the decorative design and making the player feel uncomfortable that “the display is different from usual”, a sudden revival effect (changing the decorative design “767” to “777”) appears By doing so, it is possible to exert an effect effect with impact. In addition, it is possible to emphasize only a part of the decorative symbols (for example, middle symbols) instead of displaying all the decorative symbols in the temporarily stopped state before the rebirth effect described above in color display or monochrome display.

  In addition, during the big hit game from time t2 to time t3, hitting effects (OP effect, in-round effect, ED effect, etc.) as shown in the figure appear, and images using special expressions also during these effects Display effects can appear. For example, conceal the type of jackpot won this time (conceal whether it is a probable big hit or a non-probable big hit), and if there is a big hit winning hold in the operation holding ball, information about this will be announced in the hit effect during the big hit When performing, during a round effect (time th to ti) and an ending effect (time ti to t3) related to a specific round game, the specific character is displayed in color to emphasize the specific character, and other images ( By displaying the background image or the like in monochrome or vice versa (by producing an effect different from the normal effect), it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and notify the information. In addition, the above-mentioned specific characters may not appear normally (in this example, when there is no promiscuous big hit or when there is no big win winning hold), or the display size is small and secretly appears as a premier position. In such a case (for example, in the case of the character image h1 as shown in FIG. 41), the character display by the special expression has a strong effect when the player notices the specific character and has an excellent effect. Can be.

  In addition, the effect display (image display effect) by the special expression is directed to the “treasure box effect” according to the first to sixth embodiments and the modifications 3 to 4 in that the player's attention is directed to a specific display object. The same effect as the object display (second object display) acting as the “attention distraction effect” can be achieved. Therefore, this example may be applied as the above-described “treasure box effect” or the “distraction effect” in the above-described modified examples 3 to 4.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine provided with display means.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame,
3 Game board,
3a gaming area,
4 outer frame,
5 ball guide rail,
6 Glass door,
7 Front operation panel
8 Upper tray unit,
9 Top saucer,
11 Ball rental button,
12 Card return button,
13 Frame production button,
13A Normal button (first effect button),
14 Ball release button,
15 Launch control handle,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 Main control unit,
21 External terminal board for frame,
24 production control unit,
28 Launch control board,
29 payout control board,
31 power supply board,
32 launcher,
34 Upper starting port,
34a Upper start sensor,
35 Lower starting port,
35a Lower start sensor,
36 liquid crystal display devices,
37 Normal design starting port,
37a Normal design start sensor,
38a, 38b Special symbol display device,
39c LED display for holding composite display,
39a Normal symbol display device,
39b Round number display device,
41 Ordinary variable winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
43 General prize opening,
43a General prize opening sensor,
44 Windmill,
45 Decorative lamp,
45a optical display device,
46 speakers,
46a sound generator,
47 Movable wing pieces,
48 Center decoration,
49 Out mouth,
50 grand prize awards,
52a Large prize opening sensor,
52 Special variable prize device,
52b Open door,
52c Solitary solenoid,
61 Movable body accessory motor,
62 Revolving light (third movable object),
66 Revolving light button (2nd effect button: Lucky Pat),
70 Exhilarating button (third effect button: rolling button),
73 Movable body 80 Clock-shaped accessory (first movable object accessory),
90 Flower-type object (second movable object object),
91 1st movable body,
92 second movable body,
201 main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 Production control CPU,
242 Production control ROM,
243 effect control RAM,
371 Treasure chest image,
372 push button image,
373 guidance notification image,
374a Arrow image pointing to the right,
374b Left arrow image.

Claims (3)

It is configured to be able to generate multiple types of gaming state,
The game area is configured to be divided into a first flow path and a second flow path depending on the strength of the game ball launched by the launching means, and the first flow path and the second flow path according to the gaming state. In a ball game machine configured so that the game progress acts on the player in an advantageous or disadvantageous manner depending on which of the following flow paths the game ball flows down,
A notice effect control means for causing the image display means to display a notice effect by a notice lottery;
Fire guidance information control means for notifying the firing guidance information regarding which of the first downflow path and the second downflow path is advantageous for the player according to the gaming state by means of an image display means. And
The firing guidance information control means has a second gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous for the player from the first gaming state in which it is advantageous for the player to aim at the first downstream route. When the transition is made, the second firing guidance information for guiding the aiming at the second flow down path is displayed as the firing guidance information, and the gaming state has shifted from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. The first firing guidance information for guiding the first downstream flow path as the firing guidance information.
When the firing guidance information display control means switches from the display of the second firing guidance information to the display of the first firing guidance information, or when the notice information control control means switches, the at least the first firing guidance information is displayed. In a predetermined period including a displayed period, an effect for diverting the player's attention from an event in which the firing guidance information is switched from the second firing guidance information to the first firing guidance information is displayed. ,
A ball game machine characterized by that. The firing guidance information display control means displays the first firing guidance information for guiding to aim at the first downstream path in a display manner similar to the second firing guidance information for guiding to aim at the second downstream path. Let
The bullet ball game machine according to claim 1, wherein: An effect for diverting the player's attention from an event in which the firing guidance information is switched from the display of the second firing guidance information to the display of the first firing guidance information is a player participation type effect.
The bullet ball game machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein

Images